neovim

options.txt (338468B)

---

*options.txt*	Nvim


	  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar


Options							*options*

For an overview of options see quickref.txt |option-list|.

Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
boolean		can only be on or off		*boolean* *toggle*
number		has a numeric value
string		has a string value

			      Type |gO| to see the table of contents.

==============================================================================
1. Setting options					*set-option* *E764*

						*:se* *:set*
:se[t][!]		Show all options that differ from their default value.
		When [!] is present every option is on a separate
		line.

:se[t][!] all		Show all options.
		When [!] is present every option is on a separate
		line.

							*E518* *E519*
:se[t] {option}?	Show value of {option}.
		NOTE: some legacy options were removed. |nvim-removed|

:se[t] {option}		Toggle option: set, switch it on.
		Number option: show value.
		String option: show value.

:se[t] no{option}	Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.

						   *:set-!* *:set-inv*
:se[t] {option}!   or
:se[t] inv{option}	Toggle option: Invert value.

			*:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
:se[t] {option}&	Reset option to its default value.
:se[t] {option}&vi	Reset option to its Vi default value.
:se[t] {option}&vim	Reset option to its Vim default value.

:se[t] all&		Set all options to their default value.  The values of
		these options are not changed:
		  'columns'
		  'lines'
		Warning: This may have a lot of side effects.

				    *:set-args* *:set=* *E487* *E521*
:se[t] {option}={value}		or
:se[t] {option}:{value}
		Set string or number option to {value}.
		For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
		hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0' or
		'0o').
		The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
		default this is a <Tab>).  Many string options with
		fixed syntax also support completing known values.
		See |cmdline-completion| and |complete-set-option|.
		White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
		will be ignored.  White space between '=' and {value}
		is not allowed.
		See |option-backslash| for using white space and
		backslashes in {value}.

:se[t] {option}+={value}				*:set+=*
		Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
		{value} to a string option.  When the option is a
		comma-separated list, a comma is added, unless the
		value was empty.
		If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
		are removed.  When adding a flag that was already
		present the option value doesn't change.
		Also see |:set-args| above.

:se[t] {option}^={value}				*:set^=*
		Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
		the {value} to a string option.  When the option is a
		comma-separated list, a comma is added, unless the
		value was empty.
		Also see |:set-args| above.

:se[t] {option}-={value}				*:set-=*
		Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
		the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
		If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
		is no error or warning.  When the option is a comma-
		separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
		becomes empty.
		When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
		exactly as they appear in the option.  Remove flags
		one by one to avoid problems.
		The individual values from a comma separated list or
		list of flags can be inserted by typing 'wildchar'.
		See |complete-set-option|.
		Also see |:set-args| above.

The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated.  For example: >
:set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
and the following arguments will be ignored.

						*:set-verbose*
When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
was last set.  Example: >
:verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
<  shiftwidth=4 ~
  Last set from modeline line 1 ~
 cindent ~
  Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim line 30 ~
This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose
set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument.
When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message.
When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
A few special texts:
Last set from modeline line 1 ~
	Option was set in a |modeline|.
Last set from --cmd argument ~
	Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +.
Last set from -c argument ~
	Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or
	|-q|.
Last set from environment variable ~
	Option was set from $VIMINIT.
Last set from error handler ~
	Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error.

						*option-backslash*
To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
backslash.  To include a backslash you have to use two.  Effectively this
means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
down).
In options 'path', 'cdpath', and 'tags', spaces have to be preceded with three
backslashes instead because they can be separated by either commas or spaces.
Comma-separated options like 'backupdir' and 'tags' will also require commas
to be escaped with two backslashes, whereas this is not needed for
non-comma-separated ones like 'makeprg'.
When setting options using |:let| and |literal-string|, you need to use one
fewer layer of backslash.
A few examples: >
  :set makeprg=make\ file	    results in "make file"
  :let &makeprg='make file'	    (same as above)
  :set makeprg=make\\\ file	    results in "make\ file"
  :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags	    results in "tags" and "/usr/tags"
  :set tags=tags\\\ file	    results in "tags file"
  :let &tags='tags\ file'	    (same as above)

  :set makeprg=make,file	    results in "make,file"
  :set makeprg=make\\,file	    results in "make\,file"
  :set tags=tags,file		    results in "tags" and "file"
  :set tags=tags\\,file	    results in "tags\,file"
  :let &tags='tags\,file'	    (same as above)

The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command.  To
include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead.  This example sets the
'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
  :set titlestring=hi\|there
This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
  :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there

Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment.  To include the '"' in
the option value, use '\"' instead.  This example sets the 'titlestring'
option to "hi "there"": >
  :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\"

For Win32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed.  More precise: For
options that expect a file name (those where environment variables are
expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not removed.  But
a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma, etc.) is used
like explained above.
There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
  :set dir=\\machine\path	    results in "\\machine\path"
  :set dir=\\\\machine\\path	    results in "\\machine\path"
  :set dir=\\path\\file	    results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
are halved.  This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept.  The third gives a
result which is probably not what you want.  Avoid it.

			*add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
			*E539*
Some options are a list of flags.  When you want to add a flag to such an
option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
  :set guioptions+=a
Remove a flag from an option like this: >
  :set guioptions-=a
This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time.  If 'guioptions' has
the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
doesn't appear.

		   *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded.  If the
environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
name is replaced with its value.  If it does not exist the '$' and the name
are not modified.  Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
follow the environment variable name.  That character and what follows is
appended to the value of the environment variable.  Examples: >
  :set term=$TERM.new
  :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.


Handling of local options			*local-options*

Note: The following also applies to |global-local| options.

Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer.  Each window or buffer
has its own copy of this option, thus each can have its own value.  This
allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another.  And set
'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.

The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
situations.  You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
the option values you would expect.  Unfortunately, doing what the user
expects is a bit complicated...

When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window.  Thus
right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.

When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized.  Since
the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
these are not used.  Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
global value, which is used for new buffers.  With ":set" both the local and
global value is changed.  With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.

When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the options from the window
that was last closed are used again.  If this buffer has been edited in this
window, the values from back then are used.  Otherwise the values from the
last closed window where the buffer was edited last are used.

It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
using these local window options.  Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
local window options, which is used when editing another buffer.  Each window
has its own copy of these values.  Thus these are local to the window, but
global to all buffers in the window.  With this you can do: >
:e one
:set list
:e two
Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
command you have also set the global value. >
:set nolist
:e one
:setlocal list
:e two
Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
global value.  Note that if you do this next: >
:e one
You will get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited "one".
The options local to a window are remembered for each buffer.  This also
happens when the buffer is not loaded, but they are lost when the buffer is
wiped out |:bwipe|.

Special local window options			*local-noglobal*

The following local window options won't be copied over when new windows are
created, thus they behave slightly differently:

Option		Reason	~
'previewwindow'	there can only be a single one
'scroll'	specific to existing window
'winfixbuf'	specific to existing window
'winfixheight'	specific to existing window
'winfixwidth'	specific to existing window

Special local buffer options

The following local buffer options won't be copied over when new buffers are
created, thus they behave slightly differently:

Option		Reason	~
'filetype'	explicitly set by autocommands
'syntax'	explicitly set by autocommands
'bufhidden'	denote |special-buffers|
'buftype'	denote |special-buffers|
'readonly'	will be detected automatically
'modified'	will be detected automatically

						*:setl* *:setlocal*
:setl[ocal][!] ...	Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
		current buffer or window.  Not all options have a
		local value.  If the option does not have a local
		value the global value is set.
		With the "all" argument: display local values for all
		local options.
		Without argument: Display local values for all local
		options which are different from the default.
		When displaying a specific local option, show the
		local value.  For a global/local boolean option, when
		the global value is being used, "--" is displayed
		before the option name.
		For a global option the global value is
		shown (but that might change in the future).

:se[t] {option}<	Set the effective value of {option} to its global
		value.
		For |global-local| options, the local value is removed,
		so that the global value will be used.
		For all other options, the global value is copied to
		the local value.

:setl[ocal] {option}<	Set the effective value of {option} to its global
		value by copying the global value to the local value.

Note that the behaviour for |global-local| options is slightly different
between string and number-based options.

						*:setg* *:setglobal*
:setg[lobal][!] ...	Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
		option without changing the local value.
		When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
		With the "all" argument: display global values for all
		local options.
		Without argument: display global values for all local
		options which are different from the default.

For buffer-local and window-local options:
Command		 global value	  local value	       condition ~
     :set option=value	     set	      set
:setlocal option=value	      -		      set
:setglobal option=value	     set	       -
     :set option?	      -		     display	 local value is set
     :set option?	    display	       -	 local value is not set
:setlocal option?	      -		     display
:setglobal option?	    display	       -


Global options with a local value			*global-local*

Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows.
For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.
You can set the local value with ":setlocal".  That buffer or window will then
use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global
value.

For example, you have two windows, both on C source code.  They use the global
'makeprg' option.  If you do this in one of the two windows: >
:set makeprg=gmake
then the other window will switch to the same value.  There is no need to set
the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
files.  You use this command: >
:setlocal makeprg=perlmake
You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
:setlocal makeprg=
This only works for a string option.  For a number or boolean option you need
to use the "<" flag, like this: >
:setlocal autoread<
Note that for non-boolean and non-number options using "<" copies the global
value to the local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value
(that matters when the global value changes later).  You can also use: >
:set path<
This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is
used.  Thus it does the same as: >
:setlocal path=
Note: In the future more global options can be made |global-local|.  Using
":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.

					*option-value-function*
Some options ('completefunc', 'findfunc', 'omnifunc', 'operatorfunc',
'quickfixtextfunc', 'tagfunc' and 'thesaurusfunc') are set to a function name
or a function reference or a lambda function.  When using a lambda it will be
converted to the name, e.g. "<lambda>123".
Examples:
>
set opfunc=MyOpFunc
set opfunc=function('MyOpFunc')
set opfunc=funcref('MyOpFunc')
set opfunc={a\ ->\ MyOpFunc(a)}

Set to a script-local function: >
set opfunc=s:MyLocalFunc
set opfunc=<SID>MyLocalFunc

Set using a funcref variable: >
let Fn = function('MyTagFunc')
let &tagfunc = Fn

Set using a lambda expression: >
let &tagfunc = {t -> MyTagFunc(t)}

Set using a variable with lambda expression: >
let L = {a, b, c -> MyTagFunc(a, b , c)}
let &tagfunc = L

Calling a function in an expr option			*expr-option-function*

The value of a few options, such as 'foldexpr', is an expression that is
evaluated to get a value.  The evaluation can have quite a bit of overhead.
One way to minimize the overhead, and also to keep the option value very
simple, is to define a function and set the option to call it without
arguments.  A |v:lua-call| can also be used.  Example: >vim
lua << EOF
  function _G.MyFoldFunc()
    -- ... compute fold level for line v:lnum
    return level
  end
EOF
set foldexpr=v:lua.MyFoldFunc()


Setting the filetype

:setf[iletype] [FALLBACK] {filetype}			*:setf* *:setfiletype*
		Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
		not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
		This is short for: >
			:if !did_filetype()
			:  setlocal filetype={filetype}
			:endif
<			This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
		setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
		settings and syntax files to be loaded.

		When the optional FALLBACK argument is present, a
		later :setfiletype command will override the
		'filetype'.  This is to be used for filetype
		detections that are just a guess.  |did_filetype()|
		will return false after this command.

			*option-window* *optwin*
:bro[wse] se[t]			*:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
:opt[ions]		Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
		Options are grouped by function.
		Offers short help for each option.  Hit <CR> on the
		short help to open a help window with more help for
		the option.
		Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
		"set" line to set the new value.  For window and
		buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
		used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
		window, in which case the window below help window is
		used (skipping the option-window).

							*$HOME*
Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
option and after a space or comma.

On Unix systems "~user" can be used too.  It is replaced by the home directory
of user "user".  Example: >
   :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.

On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.

NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".

						*$HOME-windows*
On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
If $HOMEDRIVE is not set then $USERPROFILE is used.

This expanded value is not exported to the environment, this matters when
running an external command: >
:echo system('set | findstr ^HOME=')
and >
:echo luaeval('os.getenv("HOME")')
should echo nothing (an empty string) despite exists('$HOME') being true.
When setting $HOME to a non-empty string it will be exported to the
subprocesses.


Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited.  How much depends on
the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.

==============================================================================
2. Automatically setting options			*auto-setting*

Besides changing options with the ":set" command, you can set options
automatically in various ways:

1. With a |config| file or a |startup| argument. You can create an
  initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and |:mksession|.
2. |autocommand|s executed when you edit a file.
3. ".nvim.lua" files in the current directory, if 'exrc' is enabled.
4. |editorconfig| in the current buffer's directory or ancestors.
5. 'modeline' settings found at the beginning or end of the file. See below.

				*modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
There are two forms of modelines.  The first form:
[text{white}]{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}

[text{white}]		empty or any text followed by at least one blank
		character (<Space> or <Tab>); "ex:" always requires at
		least one blank character
{vi:|vim:|ex:}		the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
[white]			optional white space
{options}		a list of option settings, separated with white space
		or ':', where each part between ':' is the argument
		for a ":set" command (can be empty)

Examples:
  vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~
  vim: tw=77 ~

The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):

[text{white}]{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]

[text{white}]		empty or any text followed by at least one blank
		character (<Space> or <Tab>); "ex:" always requires at
		least one blank character
{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}	the string "vi:", "vim:", "Vim:" or "ex:"
[white]			optional white space
se[t]			the string "set " or "se " (note the space); When
		"Vim" is used it must be "set".
{options}		a list of options, separated with white space, which
		is the argument for a ":set" command
:			a colon
[text]			any text or empty

Examples: >
  /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
  /* Vim: set ai tw=75: */

The white space before {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} is required.  This minimizes the
chance that a normal word like "lex:" is caught.  There is one exception:
"vi:" and "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with
version 3.0).  Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this
could be short for "example:").

If the modeline is disabled within a modeline, subsequent modelines will be
ignored.  This is to allow turning off modeline on a per-file basis.  This is
useful when a line looks like a modeline but isn't.  For example, it would be
good to start a YAML file containing strings like "vim:" with
   # vim: nomodeline ~
so as to avoid modeline misdetection.  Following options on the same line
after modeline deactivation, if any, are still evaluated (but you would
normally not have any).

						*modeline-local*
The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
buffer and window that contain the file.  Although it's possible to set global
options from a modeline, this is unusual.  If you have two windows open and
the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result
depends on which one was opened last.

When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options
from the modeline are used.  Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local
option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer
in another window.  But window-local options will be set.

						*modeline-version*
If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
number can be specified where "vim:" or "Vim:" is used:
vim{vers}:	version {vers} or later
vim<{vers}:	version before {vers}
vim={vers}:	version {vers}
vim>{vers}:	version after {vers}
{vers} is 700 for Vim 7.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 7.0: >
/* vim700: set foldmethod=marker */
To use a modeline for Vim after version 7.2: >
/* vim>702: set cole=2: */
There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
The modeline is ignored if {vers} does not fit in an integer.


The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.

Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
like: >
  /* vi:ts=4: */
will give an error message for the trailing "*/".  This line is OK: >
  /* vi:set ts=4: */

If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.

If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'.  The
backslash in front of the ':' will be removed.  Example: >
  /* vi:set fillchars=stl\:^,vert\:\|: */
This sets the 'fillchars' option to "stl:^,vert:\|".  Only a single backslash
before the ':' is removed.  Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
						*E992*
No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).  And not all options
can be set.  For some options a flag is set, so that when the value is used
the |sandbox| is effective.  Some options can only be set from the modeline
when 'modelineexpr' is set (the default is off).

Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline causes trouble.  E.g.,
when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines are wrapped unexpectedly.
So disable modelines before editing untrusted text.  The mail ftplugin does
this, for example.

Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string.  For
example: >
au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
"VAR".

==============================================================================
3. Options summary					*option-summary*

In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
an abbreviation if there is one.  Both forms may be used.

In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
is entered.  When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.

Most options are the same in all windows and buffers.  There are a few that
are specific to how the text is presented in a window.  These can be set to a
different value in each window.  For example the 'list' option can be set in
one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
at the same time.  There are a few options that are specific to a certain
file.  These can have a different value for each file or buffer.  For example
the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
program.

global			one option for all buffers and windows
local to window		each window has its own copy of this option
local to buffer		each buffer has its own copy of this option

When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
are used as a default value for the window-specific options.  For the
buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
'cpoptions' option.  If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
first entered.  If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
is entered, this is almost like having global options.  If 's' and 'S' are not
present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
buffer is created.

Hidden options						*hidden-options*

Not all options are supported in all versions.  This depends on the supported
features and sometimes on the system.  A remark about this is in curly braces
below.  When an option is not supported, it is called a hidden option.  Trying
to get the value of a hidden option will not give an error, it will return the
default value for that option instead. You can't change the value of a hidden
option.

To test if "foo" is a valid option name, use something like this: >
if exists('&foo')
This also returns true for a hidden option.  To test if option "foo" is really
supported use something like this: >
if exists('+foo')
<
						*E355*
A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.

		*'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
'allowrevins' 'ari'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Allow CTRL-_ in Insert mode.  This is default off, to avoid that users
that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get into reverse
Insert mode, and don't know how to get out.  See 'revins'.

					*'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
'ambiwidth' 'ambw'	string	(default "single")
		global
Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
letters, Cyrillic letters).

There are currently two possible values:
"single":	Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII.  This is
		expected by most users.
"double":	Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
						*E834* *E835*
The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
contains a character that would be double width.  These errors may
also be given when calling setcellwidths().

The values are overruled for characters specified with
|setcellwidths()|.

There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
legacy/traditional CJK encodings.  In those encodings, Euro,
Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them.  This is also
true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
file.  Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
(or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font.  Perhaps it also has
to be set to "double" under CJK MS-Windows when the system locale is
set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode Standard Annex #11
(https://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).

			*'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
'arabic' 'arab'		boolean	(default off)
		local to window
This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
Setting this option will:
- Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
- Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
- Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
  between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
- Set the 'delcombine' option

Resetting this option will:
- Reset the 'rightleft' option.
- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
option).
Also see |l10n-arabic.txt|.

	*'arabicshape'* *'arshape'* *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
'arabicshape' 'arshape'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
one which encompasses:
  a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
     within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
  b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
  c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone
form.
Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
further details see |l10n-arabic.txt|.

		*'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
'autochdir' 'acd'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
or selected.  When a buffer has no name it also has no directory, thus
the current directory won't change when navigating to it.
Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.

		*'autocomplete'* *'ac'* *'noautocomplete'* *'noac'*
'autocomplete' 'ac'	boolean	(default off)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
When on, Vim shows a completion menu as you type, similar to using
|i_CTRL-N|, but triggered automatically.  See |ins-autocompletion|.

				*'autocompletedelay'* *'acl'*
'autocompletedelay' 'acl'	number	(default 0)
		global
Delay in milliseconds before the autocomplete menu appears after
typing.  If you prefer it not to open too quickly, set this value
slightly above your typing speed.  See |ins-autocompletion|.

				*'autocompletetimeout'* *'act'*
'autocompletetimeout' 'act'	number	(default 80)
		global
Initial timeout (in milliseconds) for the decaying time-sliced
completion algorithm.  Starts at this value, halves for each slower
source until a minimum is reached.  All sources run, but slower ones
are quickly de-prioritized.  The default is tuned so the popup menu
opens within ~200ms even with multiple slow sources on a slow system.
Changing this value is rarely needed.  Only 80 or higher is valid.
Special case: when 'complete' contains "F" or "o" (function sources),
a longer timeout is used, allowing up to ~1s for sources such as LSP
servers that may sometimes take longer (e.g., while loading modules).
See |ins-autocompletion|.

		*'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
'autoindent' 'ai'	boolean	(default on)
		local to buffer
Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command).  If you do not
type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
<Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again.  Moving the cursor
to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included
in 'cpoptions'.
When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
line.
When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
a different way.

			*'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
'autoread' 'ar'		boolean	(default on)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
When the file has been deleted this is not done, so you have the text
from before it was deleted.  When it appears again then it is read.
|timestamp|
If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
using the global value: >vim
	set autoread<
<

			*'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
'autowrite' 'aw'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
`:next`, `:rewind`, `:last`, `:first`, `:previous`, `:stop`,
`:suspend`, `:tag`, `:!`, `:make`, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when
a `:buffer`, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one
to another file.
A buffer is not written if it becomes hidden, e.g. when 'bufhidden' is
set to "hide" and `:next` is used.
Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
'autowriteall' for that.
Some buffers will not be written, specifically when 'buftype' is
"nowrite", "nofile", "terminal" or "prompt".
USE WITH CARE: If you make temporary changes to a buffer that you
don't want to be saved this option may cause it to be saved anyway.
Renaming the buffer with ":file {name}" may help avoid this.

		*'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
'autowriteall' 'awa'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew",
":quit", ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim
window.
Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
been set.

					*'background'* *'bg'*
'background' 'bg'	string	(default "dark")
		global
When set to "dark" or "light", adjusts the default color groups for
that background type.  The |TUI| or other UI sets this on startup
(triggering |OptionSet|) if it can detect the background color.

This option does NOT change the background color, it tells Nvim what
the "inherited" (terminal/GUI) background looks like.
See |:hi-normal| if you want to set the background color explicitly.
					*g:colors_name*
When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set)
changing 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded.  If
the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
be undone.  First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed.

Normally this option would be set in the vimrc file.  Possibly
depending on the terminal name.  Example: >vim
	if $TERM ==# "xterm"
	  set background=dark
	endif
<	When this option is changed, the default settings for the highlight groups
will change.  To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
the setting of the 'background' option.

					*'backspace'* *'bs'*
'backspace' 'bs'	string	(default "indent,eol,start")
		global
Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
mode.  This is a list of items, separated by commas.  Each item allows
a way to backspace over something:
value	effect	~
indent	allow backspacing over autoindent
eol	allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
start	allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
	stop once at the start of insert.
nostop	like start, except CTRL-W and CTRL-U do not stop at the start
	of insert.

When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used, none of
the ways mentioned for the items above are possible.

			*'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
'backup' 'bk'		boolean	(default off)
		global
Make a backup before overwriting a file.  Leave it around after the
file has been successfully written.  If you do not want to keep the
backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
the default).  If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
options (use this if your file system is almost full).  See the
|backup-table| for more explanations.
When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
oldest version of a file.

					*'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
'backupcopy' 'bkc'	string	(default "auto")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
done.  This is a comma-separated list of words.

The main values are:
"yes"	make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
"no"	rename the file and write a new one
"auto"	one of the previous, what works best

Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
"breaksymlink"	always break symlinks when writing
"breakhardlink"	always break hardlinks when writing

Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
- Takes extra time to copy the file.
+ When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
  has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
- When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
  not of the real file.

Renaming the file and writing a new one:
+ It's fast.
- Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
  file.
- When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.

The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming the
file is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on
and the file is not a link) that is used.  When problems are expected,
a copy will be made.

The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto".  When included, they
force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
become the backup and writing a new file in its place.  This can be
useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
be propagated back to the original source.
							*crontab*
One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
backup file instead of the newly created file.  "crontab -e" is an
example, as are several |file-watcher| daemons like inotify.  In that
case you probably want to switch this option.

When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
with the new text.  This means that protection bits, owner and
symbolic links of the original file are unmodified.  The backup file,
however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file.  The
group of the backup is set to the group of the original file.  If this
fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
others.

When the file is renamed, this is the other way around: The backup has
the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
is owned by the current user.  When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
link, the new file will not!  That's why the "auto" value doesn't
rename when the file is a link.  The owner and group of the newly
written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
the system may refuse to do this.  In that case the "auto" value will
again not rename the file.

					*'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
'backupdir' 'bdir'	string	(default ".,$XDG_STATE_HOME/nvim/backup//")
		global
List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
  where this is possible.  If none of the directories exist Nvim will
  attempt to create the last directory in the list.
- Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
  impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
  as the edited file.
- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
  the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
  "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
  ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
  of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
  name, precede it with a backslash.
- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
- A directory name may end in an '/'.
- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
  the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
  with all path separators changed to percent '%' signs.  This will
  ensure file name uniqueness in the backup directory.
  On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
  separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
  include the comma in the file name.  Therefore it is recommended to
  use '//', instead of '\\'.
- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
  get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >vim
    set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
<
See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >vim
	set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
<	You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
home directory for this to work properly.
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
uses another default.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
'backupext' 'bex'	string	(default "~")
		global
String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
backup file.  The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
".bak" that you want to keep.
Only normal file name characters can be used; `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.

If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
include a timestamp. >vim
	au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' .. strftime("%Y%b%d%X") .. '~'
<	Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.

					*'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
'backupskip' 'bsk'	string	(default "$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
                                Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
                                Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
		global
A list of file patterns.  When one of the patterns matches with the
name of the file which is written, no backup file is created.  Both
the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
backups if you don't care about losing the file.

Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
$HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >vim
	let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') .. '/tmp/*'

<	Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
the newly created file).  Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|.

					*'belloff'* *'bo'*
'belloff' 'bo'		string	(default "all")
		global
Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung.  It is a comma-
separated list of items.  For each item that is present, the bell will
be silenced.  This is most useful to specify specific events in insert
mode to be silenced.
You can also make it flash by using 'visualbell'.

item	    meaning when present	~
all	    All events.
backspace   When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an
	    error.
cursor	    Fail to move around using the cursor keys or
	    <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|.
complete    Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or
	    |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.
copy	    Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or
	    |i_CTRL-E|.
ctrlg	    Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode.
error	    Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line)
	    (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|).
esc	    hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|.
hangul	    Ignored.
lang	    Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL.
mess	    No output available for |g<|.
showmatch   Error occurred for 'showmatch' function.
operator    Empty region error |cpo-E|.
register    Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|.
shell	    Bell from shell output |:!|.
spell	    Error happened on spell suggest.
term	    Bell from |:terminal| output.
wildmode    More matches in |cmdline-completion| available
	    (depends on the 'wildmode' setting).

This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should
be rung.  For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to
indicate that an error occurred.  It can be silenced by adding the
"error" keyword.

			*'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
'binary' 'bin'		boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
This option should be set before editing a binary file.  You can also
use the |-b| Vim argument.  When this option is switched on a few
options will be changed (also when it already was on):
	'textwidth'  will be set to 0
	'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
	'modeline'   will be off
	'expandtab'  will be off
Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
separates lines).
The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
file is read without conversion.
NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing.  You might want to set
'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
'bin' is switched from on to off.  Each buffer has its own set of
saved option values.
To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
files you edit.
When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer).  See
the 'endofline' option.

					*'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
'bomb'			boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
- this option is on
- the 'binary' option is off
- 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
  endian variants.
Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows.  For other applications it
causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
appear halfway through the resulting file.  Gcc doesn't accept a BOM.
When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
don't see it when editing.  When you don't change the options, the BOM
will be restored when writing the file.

					*'breakat'* *'brk'*
'breakat' 'brk'		string	(default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
		global
This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII characters.

		*'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'*
'breakindent' 'bri'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of
space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal
blocks of text.

				*'breakindentopt'* *'briopt'*
'breakindentopt' 'briopt'	string	(default "")
		local to window
Settings for 'breakindent'.  It can consist of the following optional
items and must be separated by a comma:
	min:{n}	    Minimum text width that will be kept after
		    applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting
		    text should normally be narrower.  This prevents
		    text indented almost to the right window border
		    occupying lots of vertical space when broken.
		    (default: 20)
	shift:{n}   After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's
		    beginning will be shifted by the given number of
		    characters.  It permits dynamic French paragraph
		    indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line
		    continuation (positive).
		    (default: 0)
	sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the
		    additional indent.
		    (default: off)
	list:{n}    Adds an additional indent for lines that match a
		    numbered or bulleted list (using the
		    'formatlistpat' setting).
		    (default: 0)
	list:-1	    Uses the width of a match with 'formatlistpat' for
		    indentation.
	column:{n}  Indent at column {n}.  Will overrule the other
		    sub-options.  Note: an additional indent may be
		    added for the 'showbreak' setting.
		    (default: off)

					*'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
'bufhidden' 'bh'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer  |local-noglobal|
This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
displayed in a window:
  <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
  hide		hide the buffer (don't unload it), even if 'hidden' is
		not set
  unload	unload the buffer, even if 'hidden' is set; the
		|:hide| command will also unload the buffer
  delete	delete the buffer from the buffer list, even if
		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also delete
		the buffer, making it behave like |:bdelete|
  wipe		wipe the buffer from the buffer list, even if
		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also wipe
		out the buffer, making it behave like |:bwipeout|

CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
that switch between buffers temporarily.
This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

		*'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
'buflisted' 'bl'	boolean	(default on)
		local to buffer
When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list.  If
it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
a file name or marks.  Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".

					*'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
'buftype' 'bt'		string	(default "")
		local to buffer  |local-noglobal|
The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
  <empty>	normal buffer
  acwrite	buffer will always be written with |BufWriteCmd|s
  help		help buffer (do not set this manually)
  nofile	buffer is not related to a file, will not be written
  nowrite	buffer will not be written
  prompt	buffer where only the last section can be edited, for
		use by plugins. |prompt-buffer|
  quickfix	list of errors |:cwindow| or locations |:lwindow|
  terminal	|terminal-emulator| buffer

This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
Also see |win_gettype()|, which returns the type of the window.

Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
One such effect is that Vim will not check the timestamp of the file,
if the file is changed by another program this will not be noticed.

A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location
list.  This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and
you are not supposed to change it.

"nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
both:		The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
		work (":w filename" does work though).
both:		The buffer is never considered to be 'modified'.
		There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
		example when you quit Vim.
both:		A swap file is only created when using too much memory
		(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
		file).
nofile only:	The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
		file name.  It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
		command.
both:		When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname"
		the buffer is made empty and autocommands are
		triggered as usual for |:edit|.
						*E676*
"acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
"nofile", but it will be written.  Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
"nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
without saving.  For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
|FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.

						*'busy'*
'busy'			number	(default 0)
		local to buffer
Sets a buffer "busy" status. Indicated in the default statusline.
When busy status is larger then 0 busy flag is shown in statusline.
The semantics of "busy" are arbitrary, typically decided by the plugin that owns the buffer.

					*'casemap'* *'cmp'*
'casemap' 'cmp'		string	(default "internal,keepascii")
		global
Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
these words, separated by a comma:
internal	Use internal case mapping functions, the current
		locale does not change the case mapping. When
		"internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
		system library functions are used when available.
keepascii	For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
		case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
		This probably only matters for Turkish.

			*'cdhome'* *'cdh'* *'nocdhome'* *'nocdh'*
'cdhome' 'cdh'		boolean	(default on on Unix, off on Windows)
		global
When on, |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| without an argument changes the
current working directory to the |$HOME| directory like in Unix.
When off, those commands just print the current directory name.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
'cdpath' 'cd'		string	(default equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
		global
This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being
searched for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with
"/", "./" or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then.
The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
'path'.  Also see |file-searching|.
The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
in the current directory first.
If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
override it: >vim
  let &cdpath = ',' .. substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
<	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.
(parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).

						*'cedit'*
'cedit'			string	(default CTRL-F)
		global
The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
Only non-printable keys are allowed.
The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
type.  The preferred way is to use |key-notation| (e.g. <Up>, <C-F>) or
a letter preceded with a caret (e.g. `^F` is CTRL-F).  Examples: >vim
	set cedit=^Y
	set cedit=<Esc>
<	|Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
See |cmdwin|.

						*'channel'*
'channel'		number	(default 0)
		local to buffer
|channel| connected to the buffer, or 0 if no channel is connected.
In a |:terminal| buffer this is the terminal channel.
Read-only.

			*'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
'charconvert' 'ccv'	string	(default "")
		global
An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
different encoding from what is desired.
'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
supported and is able to do the conversion.  Using iconv() is
preferred, because it is much faster.
'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
file to convert from.  You will have to save the text in a file first.
The expression must return zero, false or an empty string for success,
non-zero or true for failure.
See |encoding-names| for possible encoding names.
Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
used.
Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
Also used for Unicode conversion.
Example: >vim
	set charconvert=CharConvert()
	fun CharConvert()
	  system("recode "
		\ .. v:charconvert_from .. ".." .. v:charconvert_to
		\ .. " <" .. v:fname_in .. " >" .. v:fname_out)
	  return v:shell_error
	endfun
<	The related Vim variables are:
	v:charconvert_from	name of the current encoding
	v:charconvert_to	name of the desired encoding
	v:fname_in		name of the input file
	v:fname_out		name of the output file
Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.

The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
faster, see |expr-option-function|.

If the 'charconvert' expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is
replaced with the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
	set charconvert=s:MyConvert()
	set charconvert=<SID>SomeConvert()
<	Otherwise the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'chistory'* *'chi'* *E1542* *E1543*
'chistory' 'chi'	number	(default 10)
		global
Number of quickfix lists that should be remembered for the quickfix
stack.  Must be between 1 and 100.  If the option is set to a value
that is lower than the amount of entries in the quickfix list stack,
entries will be removed starting from the oldest one.  If the current
quickfix list was removed, then the quickfix list at top of the stack
(the most recently created) will be used in its place.  For additional
info, see |quickfix-stack|.

			*'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
'cindent' 'cin'		boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
Enables automatic C program indenting.  See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
preferred indent style.
If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
external program.
See |C-indenting|.
When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
option or 'indentexpr'.

					*'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
'cinkeys' 'cink'	string	(default "0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
		local to buffer
A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
the current line.  Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
empty.
For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
See |C-indenting|.

					*'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
'cinoptions' 'cino'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
program.  See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
|C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.

				*'cinscopedecls'* *'cinsd'*
'cinscopedecls' 'cinsd'	string	(default "public,protected,private")
		local to buffer
Keywords that are interpreted as a C++ scope declaration by |cino-g|.
Useful e.g. for working with the Qt framework that defines additional
scope declarations "signals", "public slots" and "private slots": >vim
	set cinscopedecls+=signals,public\ slots,private\ slots
<

					*'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
'cinwords' 'cinw'	string	(default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
		local to buffer
These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set.  For 'cindent' this is only done at
an appropriate place (inside {}).
Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'.  If case doesn't
matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
"if,If,IF".

					*'clipboard'* *'cb'*
'clipboard' 'cb'	string	(default "")
		global
This option is a list of comma-separated names.
These names are recognized:

					*clipboard-unnamed*
unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register "*"
		for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
		would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
		register is explicitly specified, it will always be
		used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
		or not.  The clipboard register can always be
		explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
		|clipboard|.

					*clipboard-unnamedplus*
unnamedplus	A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the
		clipboard register "+" (|quoteplus|) instead of
		register "*" for all yank, delete, change and put
		operations which would normally go to the unnamed
		register.  When "unnamed" is also included to the
		option, yank and delete operations (but not put)
		will additionally copy the text into register
		"*". See |clipboard|.

					*'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
'cmdheight' 'ch'	number	(default 1)
		global or local to tab page
Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
|hit-enter| prompts.
The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab
page can have a different value.

When 'cmdheight' is zero, there is no command-line unless it is being
used.  The command-line will cover the last line of the screen when
shown.

WARNING: `cmdheight=0` is EXPERIMENTAL. Expect some unwanted behaviour.
Some 'shortmess' flags and similar mechanism might fail to take effect,
causing unwanted hit-enter prompts.  Some informative messages, both
from Nvim itself and plugins, will not be displayed.

					*'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
'cmdwinheight' 'cwh'	number	(default 7)
		global
Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|

					*'colorcolumn'* *'cc'*
'colorcolumn' 'cc'	string	(default "")
		local to window
'colorcolumn' is a comma-separated list of screen columns that are
highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|.  Useful to align
text.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with
'+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. >vim

	set cc=+1	  " highlight column after 'textwidth'
	set cc=+1,+2,+3  " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'
	hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey
<
When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.
A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.

					*'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
'columns' 'co'		number	(default 80 or terminal width)
		global
Number of columns of the screen.  Normally this is set by the terminal
initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |ginit.vim| file.
When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.  For
the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to
what fits on the screen.  You can use this command to get the widest
window possible: >vim
	set columns=9999
<	Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.

				*'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
'comments' 'com'	string	(default "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-,fb:•")
		local to buffer
A comma-separated list of strings that can start a comment line.  See
|format-comments|.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
insert a space.

				*'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
'commentstring' 'cms'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
A template for a comment.  The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
comment text, and should be padded with a space when possible.
Used for |commenting| and to add markers for folding, see |fold-marker|.

					*'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
'complete' 'cpt'	string	(default ".,w,b,u,t")
		local to buffer
This option controls how completion |ins-completion| behaves when
using CTRL-P, CTRL-N, or |ins-autocompletion|.  It is also used for
whole-line completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of
completion and the places to scan.  It is a comma-separated list of
flags:
.	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
w	scan buffers from other windows
b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
U	scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
k	scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
kspell  use the currently active spell checking |spell|
k{dict}	scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
	patterns are valid too.  For example: >vim
		set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
<	s	scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
s{tsr}	scan the file {tsr}.  Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
	are valid too.
i	scan current and included files
d	scan current and included files for defined name or macro
	|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
]	tag completion
t	same as "]"
f	scan the buffer names (as opposed to buffer contents)
F{func}	call the function {func}.  Multiple "F" flags may be
	specified.  Refer to |complete-functions| for details on how
	the function is invoked and what it should return.  The value
	can be the name of a function or a |Funcref|.  For |Funcref|
	values, spaces must be escaped with a backslash ('\'), and
	commas with double backslashes ('\\') (see |option-backslash|).
	Unlike other sources, functions can provide completions
	starting from a non-keyword character before the cursor, and
	their start position for replacing text may differ from other
	sources.  If the Dict returned by the {func} includes
	`{"refresh": "always"}`, the function will be invoked again
	whenever the leading text changes.
	If generating matches is potentially slow, call
	|complete_check()| periodically to keep Vim responsive.  This
	is especially important for |ins-autocompletion|.
F	equivalent to using "F{func}", where the function is taken
	from the 'completefunc' option.
o	equivalent to using "F{func}", where the function is taken
	from the 'omnifunc' option.

Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
(gzipped files for example).  Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
whole-line completion.

CTRL-N, CTRL-P, and |ins-autocompletion| can be used for any
'iskeyword'-based completion (dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included
patterns |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|, and normal
expansions).  With the "F" and "o" flags in 'complete', non-keywords
can also be completed.

An optional match limit can be specified for a completion source by
appending a caret ("^") followed by a {count} to the source flag.
For example: ".^9,w,u,t^5" limits matches from the current buffer to 9
and from tags to 5.  Other sources remain unlimited.
Note: The match limit takes effect only during forward completion
(CTRL-N) and is ignored during backward completion (CTRL-P).

					*'completefunc'* *'cfu'*
'completefunc' 'cfu'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion
with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for
more information.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'completeitemalign'* *'cia'*
'completeitemalign' 'cia'	string	(default "abbr,kind,menu")
		global
A comma-separated list of strings that controls the alignment and
display order of items in the popup menu during Insert mode
completion.  The supported values are "abbr", "kind", and "menu".
These values allow customizing how |complete-items| are shown in the
popup menu.  Note: must always contain those three values in any
order.

					*'completeopt'* *'cot'*
'completeopt' 'cot'	string	(default "menu,popup")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
A comma-separated list of options for Insert mode completion
|ins-completion|.  The supported values are:

   fuzzy    Enable |fuzzy-matching| for completion candidates.  This
	    allows for more flexible and intuitive matching, where
	    characters can be skipped and matches can be found even
	    if the exact sequence is not typed (disabled for thesaurus
	    completion |compl-thesaurus|).

   longest
	    When 'autocomplete' is not active, only the longest common
	    prefix of the matches is inserted (disabled for thesaurus
	    completion |compl-thesaurus|).  If the popup menu is
	    displayed, you can use CTRL-L to add more characters.
	    Whether case is ignored depends on the type of completion.
	    For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option applies.

	    When 'autocomplete' is active and no completion item is
	    selected, the longest common prefix of the matches is
	    inserted after the cursor.  The prefix is taken either
	    from all displayed items or only from items in the current
	    buffer.  The inserted text is highlighted with
	    |hl-PreInsert|, and the cursor position does not change
	    (similar to `"preinsert"`).  Press CTRL-Y to accept.
	    See also |preinserted()|.

   menu	    Use a popup menu to show the possible completions.  The
	    menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
	    sufficient colors are available.  |ins-completion-menu|

   menuone  Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.
	    Useful when there is additional information about the
	    match, e.g., what file it comes from.

   nearest  Matches are listed based on their proximity to the cursor
	    position, unlike the default behavior, which only
	    considers proximity for matches appearing below the
	    cursor.  This applies only to matches from the current
	    buffer.  No effect if "fuzzy" is present.

   noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects
	    a match from the menu.  Only works in combination with
	    "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present.

   noselect Same as "noinsert", except that no menu item is
	    pre-selected.  If both "noinsert" and "noselect" are
	    present, "noselect" takes precedence.  This is enabled
	    automatically when 'autocomplete' is on, unless
	    "preinsert" is also enabled.

   nosort   Disable sorting of completion candidates based on fuzzy
	    scores when "fuzzy" is enabled.  Candidates will appear
	    in their original order.

   popup    Show extra information about the currently selected
	    completion in a popup window.  Only works in combination
	    with "menu" or "menuone".  Overrides "preview".

   preinsert
	    Inserts the text of the first completion candidate beyond
	    the current leader, highlighted with |hl-PreInsert|.
	    The cursor does not move.
	    Requires "fuzzy" to be unset, and either "menuone" in
	    'completeopt' or 'autocomplete' enabled.  When
	    'autocomplete' is enabled, this does not work if
	    'ignorecase' is set without 'infercase'.
	    See also |preinserted()|.

   preview  Show extra information about the currently selected
	    completion in the preview window.  Only works in
	    combination with "menu" or "menuone".

Only "fuzzy", "longest", "popup", "preinsert" and "preview" have an
effect when 'autocomplete' is enabled.

This option does not apply to |cmdline-completion|.  See 'wildoptions'
for that.

					*'completeslash'* *'csl'*
'completeslash' 'csl'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
		only modifiable in MS-Windows
When this option is set it overrules 'shellslash' for completion:
- When this option is set to "slash", a forward slash is used for path
  completion in insert mode.  This is useful when editing HTML tag, or
  Makefile with 'noshellslash' on MS-Windows.
- When this option is set to "backslash", backslash is used.  This is
  useful when editing a batch file with 'shellslash' set on
  MS-Windows.
- When this option is empty, same character is used as for
  'shellslash'.
For Insert mode completion the buffer-local value is used.  For
command line completion the global value is used.

				*'completetimeout'* *'cto'*
'completetimeout' 'cto'	number	(default 0)
		global
Like 'autocompletetimeout', but applies to |i_CTRL-N| and |i_CTRL-P|
completion.  Value of 0 disables the timeout; positive values allowed.

				*'concealcursor'* *'cocu'*
'concealcursor' 'cocu'	string	(default "")
		local to window
Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.
When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in
other lines.
  n		Normal mode
  v		Visual mode
  i		Insert mode
  c		Command line editing, for 'incsearch'

'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.
A useful value is "nc".  This is used in help files.  So long as you
are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text
or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that
you can see what you are doing.
Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's
displayed.  E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.

					*'conceallevel'* *'cole'*
'conceallevel' 'cole'	number	(default 0)
		local to window
Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal|
is shown:

Value		Effect ~
0		Text is shown normally
1		Each block of concealed text is replaced with one
		character.  If the syntax item does not have a custom
		replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the
		character defined in 'listchars' is used.
		It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.
2		Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a
		custom replacement character defined (see
		|:syn-cchar|).
3		Concealed text is completely hidden.

Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can
edit and copy the text.  This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'
option.

			*'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
'confirm' 'cf'		boolean	(default off)
		global
When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
instead raise a dialog asking if you wish to save the current
file(s).  You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
command.
Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.

		*'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
'copyindent' 'ci'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
new line.  Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is enabled,
in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option makes the
new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
existing line.  'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab
remains a Tab.  If the new indent is greater than on the existing
line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
See 'preserveindent'.

					*'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* *cpo*
'cpoptions' 'cpo'	string	(default "aABceFs_")
		global
A sequence of single character flags.  When a character is present
this indicates Vi-compatible behavior.  This is used for things where
not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
Commas can be added for readability.
To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

    contains	behavior	~
							*cpo-a*
	a	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
		argument will set the alternate file name for the
		current window.
							*cpo-A*
	A	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
		argument will set the alternate file name for the
		current window.
							*cpo-b*
	b	"\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
		the map command.  The '\' is included in the mapping,
		the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
		command.  Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
		include the '|' in the mapping.  Applies to all
		mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
		See also |map_bar|.
							*cpo-B*
	B	A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
		abbreviations, user commands and the "to" part of the
		menu commands.  Remove this flag to be able to use a
		backslash like a CTRL-V.  For example, the command
		":map X \<Esc>" results in X being mapped to:
			'B' included:	"\^["	 (^[ is a real <Esc>)
			'B' excluded:	"<Esc>"  (5 characters)
							*cpo-c*
	c	Searching continues at the end of any match at the
		cursor position, but not further than the start of the
		next line.  When not present searching continues
		one character from the cursor position.  With 'c'
		"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
		"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
							*cpo-C*
	C	Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
		backslash.  See |line-continuation|.
							*cpo-d*
	d	Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
		the tags file relative to the current file, but the
		tags file in the current directory.
							*cpo-D*
	D	Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
		commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
		|t|.
							*cpo-e*
	e	When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
		<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
		linewise.  If this flag is not present, the register
		is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
		<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
		and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
							*cpo-E*
	E	It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
		"gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
		at least one character is to be operated on.  Example:
		This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
							*cpo-f*
	f	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
		argument will set the file name for the current
		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
		yet.
							*cpo-F*
	F	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
		argument will set the file name for the current
		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
		yet.  Also see |cpo-P|.
							*cpo-i*
	i	When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
		leave it modified.
							*cpo-I*
	I	When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
		indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
							*cpo-J*
	J	A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
		the '.', '!' or '?'.  A <Tab> is not recognized as
		white space.
							*cpo-K*
	K	Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
		halfway through a mapping.  This breaks mapping
		<F1><F1> when only part of the second <F1> has been
		read.  It enables cancelling the mapping by typing
		<F1><Esc>.
							*cpo-l*
	l	Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
		literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
		See |/[]|
		   'l' included: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
		   'l' excluded: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space> and <Tab>
							*cpo-L*
	L	When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
		'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
		(see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
		the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
							*cpo-m*
	m	When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
		second.  When not included, a showmatch will wait half
		a second or until a character is typed.  'showmatch'
							*cpo-M*
	M	When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
		account.  Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
		parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
		backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
							*cpo-n*
	n	When included, the column used for 'number' and
		'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped
		lines.
							*cpo-o*
	o	Line offset to search command is not remembered for
		next search.
							*cpo-O*
	O	Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
		when it didn't exist when editing it.  This is a
		protection against a file unexpectedly created by
		someone else.  Vi didn't complain about this.
							*cpo-P*
	P	When included, a ":write" command that appends to a
		file will set the file name for the current buffer, if
		the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and
		the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|.
							*cpo-q*
	q	When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
		position where it would be when joining two lines.
							*cpo-r*
	r	Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
		command, instead of the actually used search string.
							*cpo-R*
	R	Remove marks from filtered lines.  Without this flag
		marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
							*cpo-s*
	s	Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
		first time.  This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
		And it is the default.  If not present the options are
		set when the buffer is created.
							*cpo-S*
	S	Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
		(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
		'syntax').  This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
		The options are set to the values in the current
		buffer.  When you change an option and go to another
		buffer, the value is copied.  Effectively makes the
		buffer options global to all buffers.

		's'    'S'     copy buffer options
		no     no      when buffer created
		yes    no      when buffer first entered (default)
		 X     yes     each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
							*cpo-t*
	t	Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
		"n" command.  Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
		the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
		last used search pattern.
							*cpo-u*
	u	Undo is Vi compatible.  See |undo-two-ways|.
							*cpo-v*
	v	Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
		Insert mode.  Without this flag the characters are
		erased from the screen right away.  With this flag the
		screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
		characters.
							*cpo-W*
	W	Don't overwrite a readonly file.  When omitted, ":w!"
		overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
							*cpo-x*
	x	<Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
		The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
		because <Esc> normally aborts a command.  |c_<Esc>|
							*cpo-X*
	X	When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
		deleted only once.  Also when repeating "R" with "."
		and a count.
							*cpo-y*
	y	A yank command can be redone with ".".  Think twice if
		you really want to use this, it may break some
		plugins, since most people expect "." to only repeat a
		change.
							*cpo-Z*
	Z	When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
		don't reset 'readonly'.
							*cpo-!*
	!	When redoing a filter command, use the last used
		external command, whatever it was.  Otherwise the last
		used -filter- command is used.
							*cpo-$*
	$	When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
		line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
		The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
		new text.  The line is redisplayed if you type any
		command that moves the cursor from the insertion
		point.
							*cpo-%*
	%	Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
		Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
		Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
		Parens inside single and double quotes are also
		counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
		disturb the matching.  For example, in a line like
		"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
		match the last one.  When this flag is not included,
		parens inside single and double quotes are treated
		specially.  When matching a paren outside of quotes,
		everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
		paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
		there is one).  This works very well for C programs.
		This flag is also used for other features, such as
		C-indenting.
							*cpo-+*
	+	When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
		'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
		itself may still be different from its file.
							*cpo->*
	>	When appending to a register, put a line break before
		the appended text.
							*cpo-;*
	;	When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search
		and the cursor is right in front of the searched
		character, the cursor won't move.  When not included,
		the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
		following occurrence.
							*cpo-~*
	~	When included, don't resolve symbolic links when
		changing directory with |:cd|, |:lcd|, or |:tcd|.
		This preserves the symbolic link path in buffer names
		and when displaying the current directory.  When
		excluded (default), symbolic links are resolved to
		their target paths.
							*cpo-_*
	_	When using |cw| on a word, do not include the
		whitespace following the word in the motion.

		*'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'*
'cursorbind' 'crb'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
column.  This option is useful for viewing the
differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,
inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are
taken into account.

		*'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'*
'cursorcolumn' 'cuc'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
|hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
slower.
If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use
these autocommands: >vim
	au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn
	au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn
<

		*'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'*
'cursorline' 'cul'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Highlight the text line of the cursor with CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it
easier to see the selected text.

				*'cursorlineopt'* *'culopt'*
'cursorlineopt' 'culopt'	string	(default "both")
		local to window
Comma-separated list of settings for how 'cursorline' is displayed.
Valid values:
"line"		Highlight the text line of the cursor with
		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
"screenline"	Highlight only the screen line of the cursor with
		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
"number"	Highlight the line number of the cursor with
		CursorLineNr |hl-CursorLineNr|.

Special value:
"both"		Alias for the values "line,number".

"line" and "screenline" cannot be used together.

						*'debug'*
'debug'			string	(default "")
		global
These values can be used:
msg	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
	anyway.
throw	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
	anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|.
beep	A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be
	produced.
The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
"msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or
'indentexpr'.

					*'define'* *'def'*
'define' 'def'		string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Pattern to be used to find a macro definition.  It is a search
pattern, just like for the "/" command.  This option is used for the
commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|.  The 'isident' option is
used to recognize the defined name after the match: >
	{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
<	See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
or backslash.
For C++ this value would be useful, to include const type declarations: >
	^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
<	You can also use "\ze" just before the name and continue the pattern
to check what is following.  E.g. for Javascript, if a function is
defined with `func_name = function(args)`: >
	^\s*\ze\i\+\s*=\s*function(
<	If the function is defined with `func_name : function() {...`: >
        ^\s*\ze\i\+\s*[:]\s*(*function\s*(
<	When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
To avoid that use `:let` with a single quote string: >vim
	let &l:define = '^\s*\ze\k\+\s*=\s*function('
<

		*'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
'delcombine' 'deco'	boolean	(default off)
		global
If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
"x" delete each combining character on its own.  When it is off (the
default) the character along with its combining characters are
deleted.
Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work differently from "2x"!

This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
to remove only the combining ones.

					*'dictionary'* *'dict'*
'dictionary' 'dict'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|.  Each file should
contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.

When this option is empty or an entry "spell" is present, and spell
checking is enabled, words in the word lists for the currently active
'spelllang' are used.  See |spell|.

To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
Where to find a list of words?
- BSD/macOS include the "/usr/share/dict/words" file.
- Try "apt install spell" to get the "/usr/share/dict/words" file on
  apt-managed systems (Debian/Ubuntu).
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
uses another default.
Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.

					*'diff'* *'nodiff'*
'diff'			boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
between files.  See |diff-mode|.

					*'diffanchors'* *'dia'*
'diffanchors' 'dia'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
List of {address} in each buffer, separated by commas, that are
considered anchors when used for diffing.  It's valid to specify "$+1"
for 1 past the last line.  "%" cannot be used for this option.  There
can be at most 20 anchors set for each buffer.

Each anchor line splits the buffer (the split happens above the
anchor), with each part being diff'ed separately before the final
result is joined.  When more than one {address} are provided, the
anchors will be sorted internally by line number.  If using buffer
local options, each buffer should have the same number of anchors
(extra anchors will be ignored).  This option is only used when
'diffopt' has "anchor" set.  See |diff-anchors| for more details and
examples.
							*E1550*
If some of the {address} do not resolve to a line in each buffer (e.g.
a pattern search that does not match anything), none of the anchors
will be used.
							*E1562*
Diff anchors can only be used when there are no hidden diff buffers.

					*'diffexpr'* *'dex'*
'diffexpr' 'dex'	string	(default "")
		global
Expression which is evaluated to obtain a diff file (either ed-style
or unified-style) from two versions of a file.  See |diff-diffexpr|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'diffopt'* *'dip'*
'diffopt' 'dip'		string	(default "internal,filler,closeoff,indent-heuristic,inline:char,linematch:40")
		global
Option settings for diff mode.  It can consist of the following items.
All are optional.  Items must be separated by a comma.

	algorithm:{text} Use the specified diff algorithm with the
			internal diff engine.  Currently supported
			algorithms are:
			myers      the default algorithm
			minimal    spend extra time to generate the
				   smallest possible diff
			patience   patience diff algorithm
			histogram  histogram diff algorithm

	anchor		Anchor specific lines in each buffer to be
			aligned with each other if 'diffanchors' is
			set.  See |diff-anchors|.

	closeoff	When a window is closed where 'diff' is set
			and there is only one window remaining in the
			same tab page with 'diff' set, execute
			`:diffoff` in that window.  This undoes a
			`:diffsplit` command.

	context:{n}	Use a context of {n} lines between a change
			and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
			When omitted a context of six lines is used.
			When using zero the context is actually one,
			since folds require a line in between, also
			for a deleted line.  Set it to a very large
			value (999999) to disable folding completely.
			See |fold-diff|.

	filler		Show filler lines, to keep the text
			synchronized with a window that has inserted
			lines at the same position.  Mostly useful
			when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
			is set.

	foldcolumn:{n}	Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
			starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.

	followwrap	Follow the 'wrap' option and leave as it is.

	horizontal	Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless
			explicitly specified otherwise).

	hiddenoff	Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it
			becomes hidden.

	iblank		Ignore changes where lines are all blank.
			Adds the "-B" flag to the "diff" command if
			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
			of the "diff" command for what this does
			exactly.
			NOTE: the diff windows will get out of sync,
			because no differences between blank lines are
			taken into account.

	icase		Ignore changes in case of text.  "a" and "A"
			are considered the same.  Adds the "-i" flag
			to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.

	indent-heuristic
			Use the indent heuristic for the internal
			diff library.

	inline:{text}	Highlight inline differences within a change.
			See |view-diffs|.  Supported values are:

			none    Do not perform inline highlighting.
			simple  Highlight from first different
				character to the last one in each
				line.  This is the default if no
				`inline:` value is set.
			char    Use internal diff to perform a
				character-wise diff and highlight the
				difference.
			word    Use internal diff to perform a
				|word|-wise diff and highlight the
				difference.  Non-alphanumeric
				multi-byte characters such as emoji
				and CJK characters are considered
				individual words.

	internal	Use the internal diff library.  This is
			ignored when 'diffexpr' is set.  *E960*
			When running out of memory when writing a
			buffer or the diff is larger than 1 GB this
			item will be ignored for diffs involving that
			buffer.  Set the 'verbose' option to see when
			this happens.

	iwhite		Ignore changes in amount of white space.  Adds
			the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
			of the "diff" command for what this does
			exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
			white space, but not leading white space.

	iwhiteall	Ignore all white space changes.  Adds
			the "-w" flag to the "diff" command if
			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
			of the "diff" command for what this does
			exactly.

	iwhiteeol	Ignore white space changes at end of line.
			Adds the "-Z" flag to the "diff" command if
			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
			of the "diff" command for what this does
			exactly.

	linematch:{n}   Align and mark changes between the most
			similar lines between the buffers.  When the
			total number of lines in the diff hunk exceeds
			{n}, the lines will not be aligned because for
			very large diff hunks there will be a
			noticeable lag.  A reasonable setting is
			"linematch:60", as this will enable alignment
			for a 2 buffer diff hunk of 30 lines each, or
			a 3 buffer diff hunk of 20 lines each.
			Implicitly sets "filler" when this is set.

	vertical	Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
			explicitly specified otherwise).

Examples: >vim
	set diffopt=internal,filler,context:4
	set diffopt=
	set diffopt=internal,filler,foldcolumn:3
	set diffopt-=internal  " do NOT use the internal diff parser
<

			*'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
'digraph' 'dg'		boolean	(default off)
		global
Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
{char2}.  See |digraphs|.

					*'directory'* *'dir'*
'directory' 'dir'	string	(default "$XDG_STATE_HOME/nvim/swap//")
		global
List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.

Possible items:
- The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
  possible.  If it is not possible in any directory, but last
  directory listed in the option does not exist, it is created.
- Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
  impossible!) and no |E303| error will be given.
- A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
  the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
  it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
  attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
  the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading "."
  is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
  the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
  with all path separators replaced by percent '%' signs (including
  the colon following the drive letter on Win32).  This will ensure
  file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
  On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
  separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
  include the comma in the file name.  Therefore it is recommended to
  use '//', instead of '\\'.
- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
  of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
  name, precede it with a backslash.
- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
- A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
  get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >vim
    set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
<
Editing the same file twice will result in a warning.  Using "/tmp" on
is discouraged: if the system crashes you lose the swap file. And
others on the computer may be able to see the files.
Use |:set+=| and |:set-=| when adding or removing directories from the
list, this avoids problems if the Nvim default is changed.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'display'* *'dy'*
'display' 'dy'		string	(default "lastline")
		global
Change the way text is displayed.  This is a comma-separated list of
flags:
lastline	When included, as much as possible of the last line
		in a window will be displayed.  "@@@" is put in the
		last columns of the last screen line to indicate the
		rest of the line is not displayed.
truncate	Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first
		column of the last screen line.  Overrules "lastline".
uhex		Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
		instead of using ^C and ~C.
msgsep		Obsolete flag. Allowed but takes no effect. |msgsep|

When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that
doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.

The "@" character can be changed by setting the "lastline" item in
'fillchars'.  The character is highlighted with |hl-NonText|.

					*'eadirection'* *'ead'*
'eadirection' 'ead'	string	(default "both")
		global
Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
	ver	vertically, width of windows is not affected
	hor	horizontally, height of windows is not affected
	both	width and height of windows is affected

			*'emoji'* *'emo'* *'noemoji'* *'noemo'*
'emoji' 'emo'		boolean	(default on)
		global
When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width.
This excludes "text emoji" characters, which are normally displayed as
single width. However, such "text emoji" are treated as full-width
emoji if they are followed by the U+FE0F variant selector.

Unfortunately there is no good specification for this and it has been
determined on trial-and-error basis.  Use the |setcellwidths()|
function to change the behavior.

					*'encoding'* *'enc'*
'encoding' 'enc'	string	(default "utf-8")
		global
String-encoding used internally and for |RPC| communication.
Always UTF-8.

See 'fileencoding' to control file-content encoding.

		*'endoffile'* *'eof'* *'noendoffile'* *'noeof'*
'endoffile' 'eof'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
Indicates that a CTRL-Z character was found at the end of the file
when reading it.  Normally only happens when 'fileformat' is "dos".
When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no CTRL-Z will be written at the
end of the file.
See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.

		*'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
'endofline' 'eol'	boolean	(default on)
		local to buffer
When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the
last line in the file.  This option is automatically set or reset when
starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL>
for the last line in the file.  Normally you don't have to set or
reset this option.
When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when
writing the file.  When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used
to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so
that when you write the file the situation from the original file can
be kept.  But you can change it if you want to.
See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.

		*'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
'equalalways' 'ea'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
splitting or closing a window.  This also happens the moment the
option is switched on.  When off, splitting a window will reduce the
size of the current window and leave the other windows the same.  When
closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
(depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting
'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively.
If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are
currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in
the future).

					*'equalprg'* *'ep'*
'equalprg' 'ep'		string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
External program to use for "=" command.  When this option is empty
the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent'
or 'indentexpr'.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
about including spaces and backslashes.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

		*'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
'errorbells' 'eb'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages.  This only
makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
mode).  See 'visualbell' to make the bell behave like a screen flash
or do nothing.  See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the bell.

					*'errorfile'* *'ef'*
'errorfile' 'ef'	string	(default "errors.err")
		global
Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
following argument.  See |-q|.
NOT used for the ":make" command.  See 'makeef' for that.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'errorformat'* *'efm'*
'errorformat' 'efm'	string	(default is very long)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
(see |errorformat|).

					*'eventignore'* *'ei'*
'eventignore' 'ei'	string	(default "")
		global
A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand
events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.
Otherwise this is a comma-separated list of event names.  Example: >vim
    set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
<
To ignore all but some events, a "-" prefix can be used: >vim
    :set ei=all,-WinLeave
<

				*'eventignorewin'* *'eiw'*
'eventignorewin' 'eiw'	string	(default "")
		local to window
Similar to 'eventignore' but applies to a particular window and its
buffers, for which window and buffer related autocommands can be
ignored indefinitely without affecting the global 'eventignore'.

Note: The following events are considered to happen outside of a
window context and thus cannot be ignored by 'eventignorewin':

	|ChanInfo|,
	|ChanOpen|,
	|CmdUndefined|,
	|CmdlineChanged|,
	|CmdlineEnter|,
	|CmdlineLeave|,
	|CmdlineLeavePre|,
	|CmdwinEnter|,
	|CmdwinLeave|,
	|ColorScheme|,
	|ColorSchemePre|,
	|CompleteChanged|,
	|CompleteDone|,
	|CompleteDonePre|,
	|DiagnosticChanged|,
	|DiffUpdated|,
	|DirChanged|,
	|DirChangedPre|,
	|ExitPre|,
	|FocusGained|,
	|FocusLost|,
	|FuncUndefined|,
	|LspAttach|,
	|LspDetach|,
	|LspNotify|,
	|LspProgress|,
	|LspRequest|,
	|LspTokenUpdate|,
	|MarkSet|,
	|MenuPopup|,
	|ModeChanged|,
	|OptionSet|,
	|PackChanged|,
	|PackChangedPre|,
	|Progress|,
	|QuickFixCmdPost|,
	|QuickFixCmdPre|,
	|QuitPre|,
	|RemoteReply|,
	|SafeState|,
	|SessionLoadPost|,
	|SessionLoadPre|,
	|SessionWritePost|,
	|ShellCmdPost|,
	|Signal|,
	|SourceCmd|,
	|SourcePost|,
	|SourcePre|,
	|SpellFileMissing|,
	|StdinReadPost|,
	|StdinReadPre|,
	|SwapExists|,
	|Syntax|,
	|TabClosed|,
	|TabClosedPre|,
	|TabEnter|,
	|TabLeave|,
	|TabNew|,
	|TabNewEntered|,
	|TermClose|,
	|TermEnter|,
	|TermLeave|,
	|TermOpen|,
	|TermRequest|,
	|TermResponse|,
	|UIEnter|,
	|UILeave|,
	|User|,
	|VimEnter|,
	|VimLeave|,
	|VimLeavePre|,
	|VimResized|,
	|VimResume|,
	|VimSuspend|,
	|WinNew|,
	|WinNewPre|

			*'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
'expandtab' 'et'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
<Tab>.  Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.

*'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'* *project-config* *workspace-config*
'exrc' 'ex'		boolean	(default off)
		global
Enables project-local configuration. Nvim will execute any .nvim.lua,
.nvimrc, or .exrc file found in the |current-directory| and all parent
directories (ordered upwards), if the files are in the |trust| list.
Use |:trust| to manage trusted files. See also |vim.secure.read()|.

Unset 'exrc' to stop further searching of 'exrc' files in parent
directories, similar to |editorconfig.root|.

To get its own location, a Lua exrc file can use |debug.getinfo()|.
See |lua-script-location|.

Compare 'exrc' to |editorconfig|:
- 'exrc' can execute any code; editorconfig only specifies settings.
- 'exrc' is Nvim-specific; editorconfig works in other editors.

To achieve project-local LSP configuration:
1. Enable 'exrc'.
2. Place LSP configs at ".nvim/lsp/*.lua" in your project root.
3. Create ".nvim.lua" in your project root directory with this line: >lua
    vim.cmd[[set runtimepath+=.nvim]]
<
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
'fileencoding' 'fenc'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
File-content encoding for the current buffer. Conversion is done with
iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.

When 'fileencoding' is not UTF-8, conversion will be done when
writing the file.  For reading see below.
When 'fileencoding' is empty, the file will be saved with UTF-8
encoding (no conversion when reading or writing a file).

WARNING: Conversion to a non-Unicode encoding can cause loss of
information!

See |encoding-names| for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
specified that can be handled by the converter, see
|mbyte-conversion|.

When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.  One exception: when
'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.
For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.

Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list at
|encoding-names|, it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
"ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".

When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
option is set, because the file would be different when written.

Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens
AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be
written.  If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set
'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".

This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.

				*'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
'fileencodings' 'fencs'	string	(default "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1")
		global
This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
an existing file.  When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
mentioned character encoding.  If an error is detected, the next one
in the list is tried.  When an encoding is found that works,
'fileencoding' is set to it.  If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
an empty string, which means that UTF-8 is used.
	WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! You can use
	the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters
	that can't be converted.
For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
"ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present).  If you prefer
another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
preferred encoding is to be used.  Example: >vim
	au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
		\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
<	This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
non-blank characters.
When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is
not used.
Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value
of 'fileencoding' is used instead.  You can set it with: >vim
	setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2
<	This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than
an empty file.
The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
(Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file.  It must not be preceded
by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
accepted.
The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
environment.  It is useful when your environment uses a non-latin1
encoding, such as Russian.
When a file contains an illegal UTF-8 byte sequence it won't be
recognized as "utf-8".  You can use the |8g8| command to find the
illegal byte sequence.
WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
	latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
	utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in a utf-8
				file
	cp1250,latin1		"cp1250" will always be used
If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
is read.

					*'fileformat'* *'ff'*
'fileformat' 'ff'	string	(default Windows: "dos", Unix: "unix")
		local to buffer
This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
    dos	    <CR><NL>
    unix    <NL>
    mac	    <CR>
When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
works like it was set to "unix".
This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
option is set, because the file would be different when written.
This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.

					*'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
'fileformats' 'ffs'	string	(default Windows: "dos,unix", Unix: "unix,dos")
		global
This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
buffer:
- When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
  always.  It is not set automatically.
- When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
  is opened.  'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer.  The
  'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
  buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
- When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
  <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file.  When starting to
  edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
  1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
     'fileformat' is set to "dos".
  2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix",
     'fileformat' is set to "unix".  Note that when a <NL> is found
     without a preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
  3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and
     if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
     This means that "mac" is only chosen when:
      "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and
      "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.
     Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before
     the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in
     the first few lines, "mac" is used.
  4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
     'fileformats' is used.
  When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
  this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
  file only, the option is not changed.
When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.

When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used.  You
can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc.

For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
done:
- When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection.  Dos
  format will be used.
- When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
  is done.  This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
  <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
  used.
Also see |file-formats|.

	*'fileignorecase'* *'fic'* *'nofileignorecase'* *'nofic'*
'fileignorecase' 'fic'	boolean	(default on for systems where case in file
                                names is normally ignored)
		global
When set, case is ignored when using file and directory names.

This option is on by default on systems where the filesystem is
traditionally case-insensitive (for example MS-Windows and macOS).
However, Vim cannot determine at runtime whether a particular
filesystem is case-sensitive or case-insensitive.

See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion.

					*'filetype'* *'ft'*
'filetype' 'ft'		string	(default "")
		local to buffer  |local-noglobal|
When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
name.
Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
This option is normally set when the file type is detected.  To enable
this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
Example, for in an IDL file: >c
	/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
<	|FileType| |filetypes|
When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
names, it should therefore not be used for a filetype.  Example: >c
	/* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */
<	This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.
This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files.  More than
one dot may appear.
This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
Only alphanumeric characters, '-' and '_' can be used (and a '.' is
allowed as delimiter when combining different filetypes).

					*'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
'fillchars' 'fcs'	string	(default "")
		global or local to window |global-local|
Characters to fill the statuslines, vertical separators, special
lines in the window and truncated text in the |ins-completion-menu|.
It is a comma-separated list of items.  Each item has a name, a colon
and the value of that item: |E1511|

  item		default		Used for ~
  stl		' '		statusline of the current window
  stlnc		' '		statusline of the non-current windows
  wbr		' '		window bar
  horiz		'─' or '-'	horizontal separators |:split|
  horizup	'┴' or '-'	upwards facing horizontal separator
  horizdown	'┬' or '-'	downwards facing horizontal separator
  vert		'│' or '|'	vertical separators |:vsplit|
  vertleft	'┤' or '|'	left facing vertical separator
  vertright	'├' or '|'	right facing vertical separator
  verthoriz	'┼' or '+'	overlapping vertical and horizontal
				separator
  fold		'·' or '-'	filling 'foldtext'
  foldopen	'-'		mark the beginning of a fold
  foldclose	'+'		show a closed fold
  foldsep	'│' or '|'	open fold middle marker
  foldinner	none		character to show instead of the
				numeric foldlevel when it would be
				repeated in a narrow 'foldcolumn'
  diff		'-'		deleted lines of the 'diff' option
  msgsep	' '		message separator 'display'
  eob		'~'		empty lines at the end of a buffer
  lastline	'@'		'display' contains lastline/truncate
  trunc		'>'		truncated text in the
				|ins-completion-menu|.
  truncrl	'<'		same as "trunc" in 'rightleft' mode

Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default.

Note that "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown", "vertleft", "vertright" and
"verthoriz" are only used when 'laststatus' is 3, since only vertical
window separators are used otherwise.

If 'ambiwidth' is "double" then "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown",
"vert", "vertleft", "vertright", "verthoriz", "foldsep" and "fold"
default to single-byte alternatives.

Example: >vim
    set fillchars=stl:\ ,stlnc:\ ,vert:│,fold:·,diff:-
<
All items support single-byte and multibyte characters.  But
double-width characters are not supported. |E1512|

The highlighting used for these items:
  item		highlight group ~
  stl		StatusLine		|hl-StatusLine|
  stlnc		StatusLineNC		|hl-StatusLineNC|
  wbr		WinBar			|hl-WinBar| or |hl-WinBarNC|
  horiz		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  horizup	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  horizdown	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  vert		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  vertleft	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  vertright	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  verthoriz	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
  fold		Folded			|hl-Folded|
  foldopen	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
  foldclose	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
  foldsep	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
  diff		DiffDelete		|hl-DiffDelete|
  msgsep	MsgSeparator		|hl-MsgSeparator|
  eob		EndOfBuffer		|hl-EndOfBuffer|
  lastline	NonText			|hl-NonText|
  trunc		one of the many Popup menu highlighting groups like
		|hl-PmenuSel|
  truncrl	same as "trunc"

				*'findfunc'* *'ffu'* *E1514*
'findfunc' 'ffu'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Function that is called to obtain the filename(s) for the |:find|
command.  When this option is empty, the internal |file-searching|
mechanism is used.

The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
See |option-value-function| for more information.

The function is called with two arguments.  The first argument is a
|String| and is the |:find| command argument.  The second argument is
a |Boolean| and is set to |v:true| when the function is called to get
a List of command-line completion matches for the |:find| command.
The function should return a List of strings.

The function is called only once per |:find| command invocation.
The function can process all the directories specified in 'path'.

If a match is found, the function should return a |List| containing
one or more file names.  If a match is not found, the function
should return an empty List.

If any errors are encountered during the function invocation, an
empty List is used as the return value.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
executing the 'findfunc' |textlock|.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

Examples:
>vim
    " Use glob()
    func FindFuncGlob(cmdarg, cmdcomplete)
	let pat = a:cmdcomplete ? $'{a:cmdarg}*' : a:cmdarg
	return glob(pat, v:false, v:true)
    endfunc
    set findfunc=FindFuncGlob

    " Use the 'git ls-files' output
    func FindGitFiles(cmdarg, cmdcomplete)
	let fnames = systemlist('git ls-files')
	return fnames->filter('v:val =~? a:cmdarg')
    endfunc
    set findfunc=FindGitFiles
<

	*'fixendofline'* *'fixeol'* *'nofixendofline'* *'nofixeol'*
'fixendofline' 'fixeol'	boolean	(default on)
		local to buffer
When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file
will be restored if missing.  Turn this option off if you want to
preserve the situation from the original file.
When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't
matter.
See the 'endofline' option.
See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.

					*'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
'foldclose' 'fcl'	string	(default "")
		global
When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
its level is higher than 'foldlevel'.  Useful if you want folds to
automatically close when moving out of them.

					*'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
'foldcolumn' 'fdc'	string	(default "0")
		local to window
When and how to draw the foldcolumn. Valid values are:
    "auto":       resize to the minimum amount of folds to display.
    "auto:[1-9]": resize to accommodate multiple folds up to the
		  selected level
    "0":          to disable foldcolumn
    "[1-9]":      to display a fixed number of columns
See |folding|.

		*'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
'foldenable' 'fen'	boolean	(default on)
		local to window
When off, all folds are open.  This option can be used to quickly
switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
folds (including manually opened or closed folds).  It can be toggled
with the |zi| command.  The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
'foldenable' is off.
This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
See |folding|.

					*'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
'foldexpr' 'fde'	string	(default "0")
		local to window
The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
for each line to obtain its fold level.  The context is set to the
script where 'foldexpr' was set, script-local items can be accessed.
See |fold-expr| for the usage.

The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
on or the 'modelineexpr' option is off.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|.

					*'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
'foldignore' 'fdi'	string	(default "#")
		local to window
Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent".  Lines starting with
characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
lines.  White space is skipped before checking for this character.
The default "#" works well for C programs.  See |fold-indent|.

					*'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
'foldlevel' 'fdl'	number	(default 0)
		local to window
Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
Setting this option to zero will close all folds.  Higher numbers will
close fewer folds.
This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
See |fold-foldlevel|.

				*'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
'foldlevelstart' 'fdls'	number	(default -1)
		global
Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
overrules this option.  Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
ignores this option and closes all folds.
It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
When the value is negative, it is not used.

				*'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
'foldmarker' 'fmr'	string	(default "{{{,}}}")
		local to window
The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker".  There
must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker.  The
marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
See |fold-marker|.

					*'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
'foldmethod' 'fdm'	string	(default "manual")
		local to window
The kind of folding used for the current window.  Possible values:
|fold-manual|	manual	    Folds are created manually.
|fold-indent|	indent	    Lines with equal indent form a fold.
|fold-expr|	expr	    'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
|fold-marker|	marker	    Markers are used to specify folds.
|fold-syntax|	syntax	    Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
|fold-diff|	diff	    Fold text that is not changed.

					*'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
'foldminlines' 'fml'	number	(default 1)
		local to window
Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed
closed.  Also for manually closed folds.  With the default value of
one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines.
Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line.
Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed.  After using
"zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.

					*'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
'foldnestmax' 'fdn'	number	(default 20)
		local to window
Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
methods.  This avoids that too many folds will be created.  Using more
than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.

					*'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
'foldopen' 'fdo'	string	(default "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,search,tag,undo")
		global
Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
command moves the cursor into a closed fold.  It is a comma-separated
list of items.
NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.
Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
(rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself)

	item		commands ~
	all		any
	block		(, {, [[, [{, etc.
	hor		horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
	insert		any command in Insert mode
	jump		far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
	mark		jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
	percent		"%"
	quickfix	":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
	search		search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
			(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
			Also for |[s| and |]s|.
	tag		jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
	undo		undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
this option is not used.  This means the operator will include the
whole closed fold.
Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
when text is inserted.
To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
set the 'foldclose' option to "all".

					*'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
'foldtext' 'fdt'	string	(default "foldtext()")
		local to window
An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
fold.  The context is set to the script where 'foldexpr' was set,
script-local items can be accessed.  See |fold-foldtext| for the
usage.

The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.

When set to an empty string, foldtext is disabled, and the line
is displayed normally with highlighting and no line wrapping.

					*'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
'formatexpr' 'fex'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
option is empty 'formatprg' is used.

The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
	      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
	      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
	      it yet!

Example: >vim
	set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
<	This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|

The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
faster, see |expr-option-function|.

The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
return "i" or "R" in this situation.

When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
the internal format mechanism.

If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
	set formatexpr=s:MyFormatExpr()
	set formatexpr=<SID>SomeFormatExpr()
<	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

					*'formatlistpat'* *'flp'*
'formatlistpat' 'flp'	string	(default "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*")
		local to buffer
A pattern that is used to recognize a list header.  This is used for
the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
the line below it.  You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
while still checking more characters.  There must be a character
following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
like there is no match.
The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
character and white space.

					*'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
'formatoptions' 'fo'	string	(default "tcqj")
		local to buffer
This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
formatting is to be done.
See |fo-table| for possible values and |gq| for how to format text.
Commas can be inserted for readability.
To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

					*'formatprg'* *'fp'*
'formatprg' 'fp'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
selected with the |gq| operator.  The program must take the input on
stdin and produce the output on stdout.  The Unix program "fmt" is
such a program.
If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead.
Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal
format function will be used |C-indenting|.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
about including spaces and backslashes.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'fsync'* *'fs'* *'nofsync'* *'nofs'*
'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
When on, the OS function fsync() will be called after saving a file
(|:write|, |writefile()|, …), |swap-file|, |undo-persistence| and |shada-file|.
This flushes the file to disk, ensuring that it is safely written.
Slow on some systems: writing buffers, quitting Nvim, and other
operations may sometimes take a few seconds.

Files are ALWAYS flushed ('fsync' is ignored) when:
- |CursorHold| event is triggered
- |:preserve| is called
- system signals low battery life
- Nvim exits abnormally

This is a |global-local| option, so it can be set per buffer, for
example when writing to a slow filesystem.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
'grepformat' 'gfm'	string	(default "%f:%l:%m,%f:%l%m,%f  %l%m")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.

If ripgrep ('grepprg') is available, this option defaults to `%f:%l:%c:%m`.

					*'grepprg'* *'gp'*
'grepprg' 'gp'		string	(default see below)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Program to use for the |:grep| command.  This option may contain '%'
and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
line.  The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
will be included.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See
|option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like
|:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|.
See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
apply equally to 'grepprg'.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.
This option defaults to:
- `rg --vimgrep -uu ` if ripgrep is available (|:checkhealth|),
- `grep -HIn $* /dev/null` on Unix,
- `findstr /n $* nul` on Windows.
Ripgrep can perform additional filtering such as using .gitignore rules
and skipping hidden files. This is disabled by default (see the -u option)
to more closely match the behaviour of standard grep.
You can make ripgrep match Vim's case handling using the
-i/--ignore-case and -S/--smart-case options.
An |OptionSet| autocmd can be used to set it up to match automatically.

			*'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
'guicursor' 'gcr'	string	(default "n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr-o:hor20,t:block-blinkon500-blinkoff500-TermCursor")
		global
Configures the cursor style for each mode. Works in the GUI and many
terminals.  See |tui-cursor-shape|.

To disable cursor-styling, reset the option: >vim
	set guicursor=

<	To enable mode shapes, "Cursor" highlight, and blinking: >vim
	set guicursor=n-v-c:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr:hor20,o:hor50
	  \,a:blinkwait700-blinkoff400-blinkon250-Cursor/lCursor
	  \,sm:block-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175

<	The option is a comma-separated list of parts.  Each part consists of a
mode-list and an argument-list:
	mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
	n	Normal mode
	v	Visual mode
	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
		if not specified)
	o	Operator-pending mode
	i	Insert mode
	r	Replace mode
	c	Command-line Normal (append) mode
	ci	Command-line Insert mode
	cr	Command-line Replace mode
	sm	showmatch in Insert mode
	t	Terminal mode
	a	all modes
The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
	hor{N}	horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
	ver{N}	vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
	block	block cursor, fills the whole character
		- Only one of the above three should be present.
		- Default is "block" for each mode.
	blinkwait{N}				*cursor-blinking*
	blinkon{N}
	blinkoff{N}
		blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
		the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
		the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
		cursor is not shown.  Times are in msec.  When one of
		the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. E.g.: >vim
			set guicursor=n:blinkon0
<
		Default is "blinkon0" for each mode.
	{group-name}
		Highlight group that decides the color and font of the
		cursor.
		In the |TUI|:
		- |inverse|/reverse and no group-name are interpreted
		  as "host-terminal default cursor colors" which
		  typically means "inverted bg and fg colors".
		- |ctermfg| and |guifg| are ignored.
	{group-name}/{group-name}
		Two highlight group names, the first is used when
		no language mappings are used, the other when they
		are. |language-mapping|

Examples of parts:
   n-c-v:block-nCursor	In Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
			block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
			highlight group
   n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25-Cursor,r-cr-o:hor20
			In Normal et al. modes, use a block cursor
			with the default colors defined by the host
			terminal.  In Insert-like modes, use
			a vertical bar cursor with colors from
			"Cursor" highlight group.  In Replace-like
			modes, use an underline cursor with
			default colors.
   i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
			In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
			30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
			"iCursor" highlight group.  Blink a bit
			faster.

The 'a' mode is different.  It will set the given argument-list for
all modes.  It does not reset anything to defaults.  This can be used
to do a common setting for all modes.  For example, to switch off
blinking: "a:blinkon0"

Examples of cursor highlighting: >vim
    highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
    highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
<

				*'guifont'* *'gfn'* *E235* *E596*
'guifont' 'gfn'		string	(default (MS-Windows) "Cascadia Code,Cascadia Mono,Consolas,Courier New,monospace"
                                           (Mac) "SF Mono,Menlo,Monaco,Courier New,monospace"
                                         (Linux) "Source Code Pro,DejaVu Sans Mono,Courier New,monospace"
                                        (others) "DejaVu Sans Mono,Courier New,monospace")
		global
This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
In its simplest form the value is just one font name.  When
the font cannot be found you will get an error message.  To try other
font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
The first valid font is used.

Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name
precede it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra
backslash before a space and a backslash.  See also
|option-backslash|.  For example: >vim
    set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
<	will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.

If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
the case of X).  The font names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim
will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.

For Win32 and Mac OS: >vim
    set guifont=*
<	will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.

The font name depends on the GUI used.

For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >vim
    set guifont=Monaco:h10
<								*E236*
Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
width).

To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
program.  The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.

For the Win32 GUI					*E244* *E245*
- takes these options in the font name:
	hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
	wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
	b   - bold
	i   - italic
	u   - underline
	s   - strikeout
	cXX - character set XX.  Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
	      BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
	      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
	      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
	      Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".

  Use a ':' to separate the options.
- A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
  backslashes to escape the spaces.
- Examples: >vim
    set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
    set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
<

			*'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
'guifontwide' 'gfw'	string	(default "")
		global
Comma-separated list of fonts to be used for double-width characters.
The first font that can be loaded is used.
Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
specified with 'guifont' and the same height.

When 'guifont' has a valid font and 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will
attempt to set 'guifontwide' to a matching double-width font.

					*'helpfile'* *'hf'*
'helpfile' 'hf'		string	(default (MS-Windows) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
                                        (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
		global
Name of the main help file.  All distributed help files should be
placed together in one directory.  Additionally, all "doc" directories
in 'runtimepath' will be used.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  For example:
"$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt".  If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
tried.  Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
spaces and backslashes.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'helpheight'* *'hh'*
'helpheight' 'hh'	number	(default 20)
		global
Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
windows.  When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
set to 'helpheight'.  Set to zero to disable.

					*'helplang'* *'hlg'*
'helplang' 'hlg'	string	(default messages language or empty)
		global
Comma-separated list of languages.  Vim will use the first language
for which the desired help can be found.  The English help will always
be used as a last resort.  You can add "en" to prefer English over
another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
language and not in the English help.
Example: >vim
	set helplang=de,it
<	This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
files.
When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
See |help-translated|.

			*'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
'hidden' 'hid'		boolean	(default on)
		global
When off a buffer is unloaded (including loss of undo information)
when it is |abandon|ed.  When on a buffer becomes hidden when it is
|abandon|ed.  A buffer displayed in another window does not become
hidden, of course.

Commands that move through the buffer list sometimes hide a buffer
although the 'hidden' option is off when these three are true:
- the buffer is modified
- 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible
- the '!' flag was used
Also see |windows|.

To hide a specific buffer use the 'bufhidden' option.
'hidden' is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.

					*'history'* *'hi'*
'history' 'hi'		number	(default 10000)
		global
A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
is remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing| and 'messagesopt' for
the number of messages to remember).
The maximum value is 10000.

			*'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
'hlsearch' 'hls'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
The |hl-Search| highlight group determines the highlighting for all
matches not under the cursor while the |hl-CurSearch| highlight group
(if defined) determines the highlighting for the match under the
cursor. If |hl-CurSearch| is not defined, then |hl-Search| is used for
both. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
are not applied.
See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
with the 'h' flag in 'shada' |shada-h|.

					*'icon'* *'noicon'*
'icon'			boolean	(default off, on when title can be restored)
		global
When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
currently being edited.  Only the last part of the name is used.
Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons.

						*'iconstring'*
'iconstring'		string	(default "")
		global
When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
the window.  This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  See
'titlestring' for example settings.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

		*'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
'ignorecase' 'ic'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Ignore case in search patterns, |cmdline-completion|, when
searching in the tags file, |expr-==| and for Insert-mode completion
|ins-completion|.
Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'.
Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
|/ignorecase|.

					*'iminsert'* *'imi'*
'iminsert' 'imi'	number	(default 0)
		local to buffer
Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
Insert mode.  Valid values:
	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
this can be used: >vim
	inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
<	This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
mode.
Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
|i_CTRL-^|.
The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".

					*'imsearch'* *'ims'*
'imsearch' 'ims'	number	(default -1)
		local to buffer
Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
entering a search pattern.  Valid values:
	-1	the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
		'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
|c_CTRL-^|.
The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
option to a valid keymap name.

					*'inccommand'* *'icm'*
'inccommand' 'icm'	string	(default "nosplit")
		global
When nonempty, shows the effects of |:substitute|, |:smagic|,
|:snomagic| and user commands with the |:command-preview| flag as you
type.

Possible values:
	nosplit	Shows the effects of a command incrementally in the
		buffer.
	split	Like "nosplit", but also shows partial off-screen
		results in a preview window.

If the preview for built-in commands is too slow (exceeds
'redrawtime') then 'inccommand' is automatically disabled until
|Command-line-mode| is done.

					*'include'* *'inc'*
'include' 'inc'		string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Pattern to be used to find an include command.  It is a search
pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|).  This option
is used for the commands "[i", "]I", "[d", etc.
Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that
comes after the matched pattern.  But if "\zs" appears in the pattern
then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it
appears, is used as the file name.  Use this to include characters
that are not in 'isfname', such as a space.  You can then use
'includeexpr' to process the matched text.
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.

					*'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
'includeexpr' 'inex'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
option to a file name.  Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >vim
	setlocal includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
<	The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
Note the double backslash: the `:set` command first halves them, then
one remains in the value, where "\." matches a dot literally.  For
simple character replacements `tr()` avoids the need for escaping: >vim
	setlocal includeexpr=tr(v:fname,'.','/')
<
Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
Note: Not used for |<cfile>|.

If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
	setlocal includeexpr=s:MyIncludeExpr()
	setlocal includeexpr=<SID>SomeIncludeExpr()
<	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

It is more efficient if the value is just a function call without
arguments, see |expr-option-function|.

The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.

			*'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
'incsearch' 'is'	boolean	(default on)
		global
While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
so far, matches.  The matched string is highlighted.  If the pattern
is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will be updated
often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>.  You
still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
cursor to the match.
You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and
previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T|
Vim only searches for about half a second.  With a complicated
pattern and/or a lot of text the match may not be found.  This is to
avoid that Vim hangs while you are typing the pattern.
The |hl-IncSearch| highlight group determines the highlighting.
When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while
typing a search command.  See also: 'hlsearch'.
If you don't want to turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all
matches while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with
autocmd.  Example: >vim
	augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight
	  autocmd!
	  autocmd CmdlineEnter [\/\?] :set hlsearch
	  autocmd CmdlineLeave [\/\?] :set nohlsearch
	augroup END
<
CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
converted to lowercase.
CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
match, excluding the characters that were already typed.

					*'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
'indentexpr' 'inde'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
'smartindent' indenting.  When 'lisp' is set, this option is
only used when 'lispoptions' contains "expr:1".
The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
which the indent is to be computed.  The cursor is also in this line
when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).

If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
	set indentexpr=s:MyIndentExpr()
	set indentexpr=<SID>SomeIndentExpr()
<	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
faster, see |expr-option-function|.

The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent.  It
can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
used for the indent).
Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
and |lispindent()|.
The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!  It must
not change the text, jump to another window, etc.  Afterwards the
cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
Normally this option would be set to call a function: >vim
	set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
<	Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
"msg".
See |indent-expression|.

The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.

					*'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
'indentkeys' 'indk'	string	(default "0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
		local to buffer
A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
the current line.  Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.

		*'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
'infercase' 'inf'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending
on the typed text.  If the typed text contains a lowercase letter
where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made
lowercase.  If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match
has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter,
and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase.
With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is.

					*'isfname'* *'isf'*
'isfname' 'isf'		string	(default for Windows:
                            "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,="
                           otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
		global
The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
path names.  Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
the tags file.  It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
Think twice before adding white space to this option.  Although a
space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim
doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion.
It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'.

Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
do its best to make it work as you would expect.  That is a bit
tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
characters.  Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes.  The
'&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
cmd.exe.

The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
Each part can be a single character number or a range.  A range is two
character numbers with '-' in between.  A character number can be a
decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
not work for digits).  Example:
	"_,-,128-140,#-43"	(include '_' and '-' and the range
				128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
will be excluded from the option.  The option is interpreted from left
to right.  Put the excluded character after the range where it is
included.  To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
option or the end of a range.  Example:
	"^a-z,#,^"	(exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
are included.  Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
plus accented characters.  To include '@' itself use "@-@".  Examples:
	"@,^a-z"	All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
			case ASCII letters.
	"a-z,A-Z,@-@"	All letters plus the '@' character.
A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
expected.  Example:
	"48-57,,,_"	Digits, comma and underscore.
A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'.  Example:
	" -~,^,,9"	All characters from space to '~', excluding
			comma, plus <Tab>.
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.

					*'isident'* *'isi'*
'isident' 'isi'		string	(default for Windows:
                                          "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
                               otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
		global
The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
match of the 'define' option.  It is also used for "\i" in a
|pattern|.  See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
option.  For '@' only characters up to 255 are used.
Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
environment variables.  E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
expand "$HOME/.local/state/nvim/shada/main.shada".  Maybe you should
change 'iskeyword' instead.

					*'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
'iskeyword' 'isk'	string	(default "@,48-57,_,192-255")
		local to buffer
Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
"w", "*", "[i", etc.  It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|.  See
'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.  For '@'
characters above 255 check the "word" character class (any character
that is categorized as a letter, number or emoji according to the
Unicode general category).

Note that there is a difference between the "\k" character class and
the |word| motion.  The former matches any word character, while the
latter stops at a change of the character class.

For C programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
"*", '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
command).
When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax
uses |:syn-iskeyword|.

					*'isprint'* *'isp'*
'isprint' 'isp'		string	(default "@,161-255")
		global
The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
screen.  It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|.  The characters from
space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded.  See
'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.

Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
	  0 -  31	"^@" - "^_"
	 32 - 126	always single characters
	   127		"^?"
	128 - 159	"~@" - "~_"
	160 - 254	"| " - "|~"
	   255		"~?"
Illegal bytes from 128 to 255 (invalid UTF-8) are
displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
displayed as <xx>.
The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
|hl-SpecialKey|

Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
characters up to 255 are specified with this option.  When a character
is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
replacement character will be shown.
Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
There is no option to specify these characters.

		*'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
'joinspaces' 'js'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
Otherwise only one space is inserted.

					*'jumpoptions'* *'jop'*
'jumpoptions' 'jop'	string	(default "clean")
		global
List of words that change the behavior of the |jumplist|.
  stack         Make the jumplist behave like the tagstack.
		Relative location of entries in the jumplist is
		preserved at the cost of discarding subsequent entries
		when navigating backwards in the jumplist and then
		jumping to a location.  |jumplist-stack|

  view          When moving through the jumplist, |changelist|,
		|alternate-file|, using |mark-motions| or when popping
		the |tagstack| try to restore the |mark-view| in which
		the action occurred.

  clean         Remove unloaded buffers from the jumplist.
		EXPERIMENTAL: this flag may change in the future.

					*'keymap'* *'kmp'*
'keymap' 'kmp'		string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Name of a keyboard mapping.  See |mbyte-keymap|.
Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
Only alphanumeric characters, '.', '-' and '_' can be used.

					*'keymodel'* *'km'*
'keymodel' 'km'		string	(default "")
		global
List of comma-separated words, which enable special things that keys
can do.  These values can be used:
   startsel	Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
		Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
		present in 'selectmode').
   stopsel	Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
<PageUp> and <PageDown>.

					*'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
'keywordprg' 'kp'	string	(default ":Man", Windows: ":help")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
expanded |:set_env|.  ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
help.  (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
value did this, which is now deprecated.)
When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim
Ex command prefixed with [count].
When "man" or "man -s" is used, Vim will automatically translate
a [count] for the "K" command to a section number.
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
Example: >vim
	set keywordprg=man\ -s
	set keywordprg=:Man
<	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
'langmap' 'lmap'	string	(default "")
		global
This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
mode.  When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
inserted directly.  When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes
care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
be able to execute Normal mode commands.
This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
mapped in Insert mode.
Also consider setting 'langremap' to off, to prevent 'langmap' from
applying to characters resulting from a mapping.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):				*greek*  >vim
    set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
<	Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >vim
    set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
<
The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas.  Each
part can be in one of two forms:
1.  A list of pairs.  Each pair is a "from" character immediately
    followed by the "to" character.  Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
2.  A list of "from" characters, a semicolon and a list of "to"
    characters.  Example: "abc;ABC"
Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash.  These are
";", ',', '"', '|' and backslash itself.

This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
back and forth between the languages.  Your language characters will
be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
langmap mappings) in the following cases:
 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
this option.   Note that this option can be changed at any time
allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!

					*'langmenu'* *'lm'*
'langmenu' 'lm'		string	(default "")
		global
Language to use for menu translation.  Tells which file is loaded
from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >vim
	"lang/menu_" .. &langmenu .. ".vim"
<	(without the spaces).  For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
matter what $LANG is set to: >vim
	set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
<	When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
the English menus: >vim
	set langmenu=none
<	This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
detection or syntax highlighting.  Once the menus are defined setting
this option has no effect.  But you could do this: >vim
	source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
	set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
	source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
<	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!

		*'langremap'* *'lrm'* *'nolangremap'* *'nolrm'*
'langremap' 'lrm'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting
from a mapping.  If setting 'langmap' disables some of your mappings,
make sure this option is off.

					*'laststatus'* *'ls'*
'laststatus' 'ls'	number	(default 2)
		global
The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
status line:
	0: never
	1: only if there are at least two windows
	2: always
	3: always and ONLY the last window
The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|

		*'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
'lazyredraw' 'lz'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
typed.  Also, updating the window title is postponed.  To force an
update use |:redraw|.
This may occasionally cause display errors.  It is only meant to be
set temporarily when performing an operation where redrawing may cause
flickering or cause a slowdown.

					*'lhistory'* *'lhi'*
'lhistory' 'lhi'	number	(default 10)
		local to window
Like 'chistory', but for the location list stack associated with a
window.  If the option is changed in either the location list window
itself or the window that is associated with the location list stack,
the new value will also be applied to the other one.  This means this
value will always be the same for a given location list window and its
corresponding window.  See |quickfix-stack| for additional info.

		*'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
'linebreak' 'lbr'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.
If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented.  Then, the value
of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.  This option
is not used when the 'wrap' option is off.
Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
with the right amount of white space.

						*'lines'* *E593*
'lines'			number	(default 24 or terminal height)
		global
Number of lines of the Vim window.
Normally you don't need to set this.  It is done automatically by the
terminal initialization code.
When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen.  You can
use this command to get the tallest window possible: >vim
	set lines=999
<	Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.

					*'linespace'* *'lsp'*
'linespace' 'lsp'	number	(default 0)
		global
		only in the GUI
Number of pixel lines inserted between characters.  Useful if the font
uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
When non-zero there is room for underlining.
With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
space for ascents and descents).  Then it makes sense to set
'linespace' to a negative value.  This may cause display problems
though!

					*'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
'lisp'			boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of).  Also happens with
"cc" or "S".  'autoindent' must also be on for this to work.
Also see 'lispwords'.
The '-' character is included in keyword characters.  Redefines the
"=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.

					*'lispoptions'* *'lop'*
'lispoptions' 'lop'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Comma-separated list of items that influence the Lisp indenting when
enabled with the 'lisp' option.  Currently only one item is supported:
	expr:1	use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting when it is set
	expr:0	do not use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting (default)
Note that when using 'indentexpr' the `=` operator indents all the
lines, otherwise the first line is not indented (Vi-compatible).

					*'lispwords'* *'lw'*
'lispwords' 'lw'	string	(default is very long)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Comma-separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting when
enabled with the 'lisp' option.

					*'list'* *'nolist'*
'list'			boolean	(default off)
		local to window
List mode: By default, show tabs as ">", trailing spaces as "-", and
non-breakable space characters as "+". Useful to see the difference
between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks. Further changed by
the 'listchars' option.

When 'listchars' does not contain "tab" field, tabs are shown as "^I"
or "<09>", like how unprintable characters are displayed.

The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character
occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode.  To get this cursor
position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: >vim
	let &list = v:true | let &lcs = 'tab:  '
<
Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth'
or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'.  See 'listchars' for
changing the way tabs are displayed.

					*'listchars'* *'lcs'*
'listchars' 'lcs'	string	(default "tab:> ,trail:-,nbsp:+")
		global or local to window |global-local|
Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
comma-separated list of string settings. *E1511*

						*lcs-eol*
  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
		omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
		line.
						*lcs-tab*
  tab:xy[z]	Two or three characters to be used to show a tab.
		The third character is optional.

  tab:xy	The 'x' is always used, then 'y' as many times as will
		fit.  Thus "tab:>-" displays: >
			>
			>-
			>--
			etc.
<
  tab:xyz	The 'z' is always used, then 'x' is prepended, and
		then 'y' is used as many times as will fit.  Thus
		"tab:<->" displays: >
			>
			<>
			<->
			<-->
			etc.
<
		When "tab:" is omitted, a tab is shown as ^I.
						*lcs-space*
  space:c	Character to show for a space.  When omitted, spaces
		are left blank.
						*lcs-multispace*
  multispace:c...
		One or more characters to use cyclically to show for
		multiple consecutive spaces.  Overrides the "space"
		setting, except for single spaces.  When omitted, the
		"space" setting is used.  For example,
		`:set listchars=multispace:---+` shows ten consecutive
		spaces as: >
			---+---+--
<
						*lcs-lead*
  lead:c	Character to show for leading spaces.  When omitted,
		leading spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
		"multispace" settings for leading spaces.  You can
		combine it with "tab:", for example: >vim
			set listchars+=tab:>-,lead:.
<
						*lcs-leadmultispace*
  leadmultispace:c...
		Like the |lcs-multispace| value, but for leading
		spaces only.  Also overrides |lcs-lead| for leading
		multiple spaces.
		`:set listchars=leadmultispace:---+` shows ten
		consecutive leading spaces as: >
			---+---+--XXX
<
		Where "XXX" denotes the first non-blank characters in
		the line.
						*lcs-leadtab*
  leadtab:xy[z]
		Like |lcs-tab|, but only for leading tabs.  When
		omitted, the "tab" setting is used for leading tabs.
		|lcs-tab| must also be set for this to work. *E1572*
		You can combine it with "tab:", for example: >vim
			let &listchars = 'tab:>-,leadtab:. '
<			This shows leading tabs as periods(.) and other tabs
		as ">--".
						*lcs-trail*
  trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
		trailing spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
		"multispace" settings for trailing spaces.
						*lcs-extends*
  extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
		off and the line continues beyond the right of the
		screen.
						*lcs-precedes*
  precedes:c	Character to show in the first visible column of the
		physical line, when there is text preceding the
		character visible in the first column.
						*lcs-conceal*
  conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
		'conceallevel' is set to 1.  A space when omitted.
						*lcs-nbsp*
  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space character
		(0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F).  Left blank when
		omitted.

The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
be used.  All characters must be single width. *E1512*

Each character can be specified as hex: >vim
	set listchars=eol:\\x24
	set listchars=eol:\\u21b5
	set listchars=eol:\\U000021b5
<	Note that a double backslash is used.  The number of hex characters
must be exactly 2 for \\x, 4 for \\u and 8 for \\U.

Examples: >vim
    set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
    set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
    set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
<	|hl-NonText| highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
"precedes". |hl-Whitespace| for "nbsp", "space", "tab", "multispace",
"lead" and "trail".

		*'loadplugins'* *'lpl'* *'noloadplugins'* *'nolpl'*
'loadplugins' 'lpl'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
of plugins.
Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|

					*'makeef'* *'mef'*
'makeef' 'mef'		string	(default "")
		global
Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
and the |:grep| command.
When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
unique.  This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
existing file.
NOT used for the ":cf" command.  See 'errorfile' for that.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'makeencoding'* *'menc'*
'makeencoding' 'menc'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Encoding used for reading the output of external commands.  When
empty, encoding is not converted.
This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`,
`:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`,
and `:laddfile`.

This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows.  If iconv is
enabled, setting 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as
setting to the system locale encoding.  Example: >vim
	set makeencoding=char	" system locale is used
<

					*'makeprg'* *'mp'*
'makeprg' 'mp'		string	(default "make")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|),
which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S|
to escape file names in case they contain special characters.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
about including spaces and backslashes.
Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for
the interpretation of a command.  When you use a filter called
"myfilter" do it like this: >vim
    set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
<	The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
where the arguments will be included, for example: >vim
    set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
<	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
'matchpairs' 'mps'	string	(default "(:),{:},[:]")
		local to buffer
Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
other.
Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot
jump between two double quotes.
The characters must be separated by a colon.
The pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and
'>' (for HTML): >vim
	set mps+=<:>

<	A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >vim
	au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;

<	For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin directory. |add-local-help|

					*'matchtime'* *'mat'*
'matchtime' 'mat'	number	(default 5)
		global
Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.

					*'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd'	number	(default 100)
		global
Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number.  But this will use
more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex
command recursion, see |E169|.
See also |:function|.
Also used for maximum depth of callback functions.

				*'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
'maxmapdepth' 'mmd'	number	(default 1000)
		global
Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
character to be used.  This normally catches endless mappings, like
":map x y" with ":map y x".  It still does not catch ":map g wg",
because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done.  See also
|key-mapping|.

					*'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'*
'maxmempattern' 'mmp'	number	(default 1000)
		global
Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.
The maximum value is about 2000000.  Use this to work without a limit.
						*E363*
When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly
behaves like CTRL-C was typed.
Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very
inefficient or too complex.  This may already happen with the pattern
`\(.\)*` on a very long line.  `.*` works much better.
Might also happen on redraw, when syntax rules try to match a complex
text structure.
Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit, in
which case you get an "Out of memory" error instead.

				*'maxsearchcount'* *'msc'*
'maxsearchcount' 'msc'	number	(default 999)
		global
Maximum number of matches shown for the search count status |shm-S|
When the number of matches exceeds this value, Vim shows ">" instead
of the exact count to keep searching fast.
Note: larger values may impact performance.
The value must be between 1 and 9999.  See also the |searchcount()|
function.

					*'menuitems'* *'mis'*
'menuitems' 'mis'	number	(default 25)
		global
Maximum number of items to use in a menu.  Used for menus that are
generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu.  Changing this
option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.

					*'messagesopt'* *'mopt'*
'messagesopt' 'mopt'	string	(default "hit-enter,history:500")
		global
Option settings for outputting messages.  It can consist of the
following items.  Items must be separated by a comma.

hit-enter	Use a |hit-enter| prompt when the message is longer than
		'cmdheight' size.

wait:{n}	Instead of using a |hit-enter| prompt, simply wait for
		{n} milliseconds so that the user has a chance to read
		the message.  The maximum value of {n} is 10000.  Use
		0 to disable the wait (but then the user may miss an
		important message).
		This item is ignored when "hit-enter" is present, but
		required when "hit-enter" is not present.

history:{n}	Determines how many entries are remembered in the
		|:messages| history.  The maximum value is 10000.
		Setting it to zero clears the message history.
		This item must always be present.

					*'mkspellmem'* *'msm'*
'mkspellmem' 'msm'	string	(default "460000,2000,500")
		global
Parameters for |:mkspell|.  This tunes when to start compressing the
word tree.  Compression can be slow when there are many words, but
it's needed to avoid running out of memory.  The amount of memory used
per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why
this tuning is complicated.

There are three numbers, separated by commas: >
	{start},{inc},{added}
<
For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory.  {start}
gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any
compression is done.  It should be a bit smaller than the amount of
memory that is available to Vim.

When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the
amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another
compression is done.  A low number means compression is done after
less words are added, which is slow.  A high number means more memory
will be allocated.

After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before
the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra
amount of memory is needed.  A low number means there is a smaller
chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's
slower.

The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and
Hungarian.  The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte.  If
you have 1 Gbyte you could use: >vim
	set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800
<	If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some
languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

			*'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
'modeline' 'ml'		boolean	(default on (off for root))
		local to buffer
If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.

		*'modelineexpr'* *'mle'* *'nomodelineexpr'* *'nomle'*
'modelineexpr' 'mle'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When on allow some options that are an expression to be set in the
modeline.  Check the option for whether it is affected by
'modelineexpr'.  Also see |modeline|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'modelines'* *'mls'*
'modelines' 'mls'	number	(default 5)
		global
If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.


		*'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'* *E21*
'modifiable' 'ma'	boolean	(default on)
		local to buffer
When off the buffer contents cannot be changed.  The 'fileformat' and
'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument.

			*'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
'modified' 'mod'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer  |local-noglobal|
When on, the buffer is considered to be modified.  This option is set
when:
1. A change was made to the text since it was last written.  Using the
   |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
   option.  But undoing changes that were made before writing the
   buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
   when it was written.
2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
   value.  The original value is set when the buffer is read or
   written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
   values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
   reset.
   Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'.
This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
an explanation.
When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
will be ignored.
Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set
when using "rA" on an "A".

					*'more'* *'nomore'*
'more'			boolean	(default on)
		global
When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled.  You will get
the |more-prompt|.  When this option is off there are no pauses, the
listing continues until finished.

						*'mouse'*
'mouse'			string	(default "nvi")
		global
Enables mouse support. For example, to enable the mouse in Normal mode
and Visual mode: >vim
	set mouse=nv
<
To temporarily disable mouse support, hold the shift key while using
the mouse.

Mouse support can be enabled for different modes:
	n	Normal mode
	v	Visual mode
	i	Insert mode
	c	Command-line mode
	h	all previous modes when editing a help file
	a	all previous modes
	r	for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt

Left-click anywhere in a text buffer to place the cursor there.  This
works with operators too, e.g. type |d| then left-click to delete text
from the current cursor position to the position where you clicked.

Drag the |status-line| or vertical separator of a window to resize it.

If enabled for "v" (Visual mode) then double-click selects word-wise,
triple-click makes it line-wise, and quadruple-click makes it
rectangular block-wise.

For scrolling with a mouse wheel see |scroll-mouse-wheel|.

Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
"* register if possible. See also 'clipboard'.

Related options:
'mousefocus'	window focus follows mouse pointer
'mousemodel'	what mouse button does which action
'mousehide'	hide mouse pointer while typing text
'selectmode'	whether to start Select mode or Visual mode

	*'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
'mousefocus' 'mousef'	boolean	(default off)
		global
The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus.  Off is the
default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.

			*'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
'mousehide' 'mh'	boolean	(default on)
		global
		only in the GUI
When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.

					*'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
'mousemodel' 'mousem'	string	(default "popup_setpos")
		global
Sets the model to use for the mouse.  The name mostly specifies what
the right mouse button is used for:
   extend	Right mouse button extends a selection.  This works
		like in an xterm.
   popup	Right mouse button pops up a menu.  The shifted left
		mouse button extends a selection.  This works like
		with Microsoft Windows.
   popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
		position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
		selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
		If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
		be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move.  This implies of
		course, that right clicking outside a selection will
		end Visual mode.
Overview of what button does what for each model:
mouse		    extend		popup(_setpos) ~
left click	    place cursor	place cursor
left drag	    start selection	start selection
shift-left	    search word		extend selection
right click	    extend selection	popup menu (place cursor)
right drag	    extend selection	-
middle click	    paste		paste

In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
Nvim creates a default |popup-menu| but you can redefine it.

Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
See |mouse-overview|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless selection.

Example: >vim
    map <S-LeftMouse>     <RightMouse>
    map <S-LeftDrag>      <RightDrag>
    map <S-LeftRelease>   <RightRelease>
    map <2-S-LeftMouse>   <2-RightMouse>
    map <2-S-LeftDrag>    <2-RightDrag>
    map <2-S-LeftRelease> <2-RightRelease>
    map <3-S-LeftMouse>   <3-RightMouse>
    map <3-S-LeftDrag>    <3-RightDrag>
    map <3-S-LeftRelease> <3-RightRelease>
    map <4-S-LeftMouse>   <4-RightMouse>
    map <4-S-LeftDrag>    <4-RightDrag>
    map <4-S-LeftRelease> <4-RightRelease>
<
Mouse commands requiring the CTRL modifier can be simulated by typing
the "g" key before using the mouse:
    "g<LeftMouse>"  is "<C-LeftMouse>	(jump to tag under mouse click)
    "g<RightMouse>" is "<C-RightMouse>	("CTRL-T")

*'mousemoveevent'* *'mousemev'* *'nomousemoveevent'* *'nomousemev'* *mouse-hover*
'mousemoveevent' 'mousemev'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When on, mouse move events are delivered to the input queue and are
available for mapping |<MouseMove>|.  The default, off, avoids the
mouse movement overhead except when needed.
Warning: Setting this option can make pending mappings to be aborted
when the mouse is moved.

					*'mousescroll'* *E5080*
'mousescroll'		string	(default "ver:3,hor:6")
		global
This option controls the number of lines / columns to scroll by when
scrolling with a mouse wheel (|scroll-mouse-wheel|). The option is
a comma-separated list. Each part consists of a direction and a count
as follows:
	direction:count,direction:count
Direction is one of either "hor" or "ver". "hor" controls horizontal
scrolling and "ver" controls vertical scrolling. Count sets the amount
to scroll by for the given direction, it should be a non negative
integer. Each direction should be set at most once. If a direction
is omitted, a default value is used (6 for horizontal scrolling and 3
for vertical scrolling). You can disable mouse scrolling by using
a count of 0.

Example: >vim
	set mousescroll=ver:5,hor:2
<	Will make Nvim scroll 5 lines at a time when scrolling vertically, and
scroll 2 columns at a time when scrolling horizontally.

					*'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
'mousetime' 'mouset'	number	(default 500)
		global
Defines the maximum time in msec between two mouse clicks for the
second click to be recognized as a multi click.

					*'nrformats'* *'nf'*
'nrformats' 'nf'	string	(default "bin,hex")
		local to buffer
This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
	incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
	letter index a), b), etc.		*octal-nrformats*
octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
	to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
	considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
	"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
bin	If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be
	considered to be binary.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
	"0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111".
unsigned    If included, numbers are recognized as unsigned.  Thus a
	leading dash or negative sign won't be considered as part of
	the number.  Examples:
	    Using CTRL-X on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2019"
	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2021").
	    Using CTRL-A on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2021"
	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2019").
	    Using CTRL-X on "0" or CTRL-A on "18446744073709551615"
	    (2^64 - 1) has no effect, overflow is prevented.
blank	If included, treat numbers as signed or unsigned based on
	preceding whitespace.  If a number with a leading dash has its
	dash immediately preceded by a non-whitespace character (i.e.,
	not a tab or a " "), the negative sign won't be considered as
	part of the number.  For example:
	    Using CTRL-A on "14" in "Carbon-14" results in "Carbon-15"
	    (without "blank" it would become "Carbon-13").
	    Using CTRL-X on "8" in "Carbon -8" results in "Carbon -9"
	    (because -8 is preceded by whitespace.  If "unsigned" was
	    set, it would result in "Carbon -7").
	If this format is included, overflow is prevented as if
	"unsigned" were set.  If both this format and "unsigned" are
	included, "unsigned" will take precedence.

Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
recognized as octal or hex.

			*'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
'number' 'nu'		boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Print the line number in front of each line.  When the 'n' option is
excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
line numbers.
Use the 'numberwidth' option to adjust the room for the line number.
When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
characters are put before the number.
For highlighting see |hl-LineNr|, |hl-CursorLineNr|, and the
|:sign-define| "numhl" argument.
					*number_relativenumber*
The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be
relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
four combinations (cursor in line 3):

	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
	'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
>
    |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
    |pear           |  2 pear       |  1 pear       |  1 pear
    |nobody         |  3 nobody     |  0 nobody     |3   nobody
    |there          |  4 there      |  1 there      |  1 there
<

					*'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
'numberwidth' 'nuw'	number	(default 4)
		local to window
Minimal number of columns to use for the line number.  Only relevant
when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines
with a line number.  Since one space is always between the number and
the text, there is one less character for the number itself.
The value is the minimum width.  A bigger width is used when needed to
fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of
rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'
is set.  Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line
number up to 999.  When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be
used. The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 20.

					*'omnifunc'* *'ofu'*
'omnifunc' 'ofu'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni
completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for
more information.
This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
|:filetype-plugin-on|
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'*
'operatorfunc' 'opfunc'	string	(default "")
		global
This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator.
See |:map-operator| for more info and an example.  The value can be
the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See
|option-value-function| for more information.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'packpath'* *'pp'*
'packpath' 'pp'		string	(default see 'runtimepath')
		global
Directories used to find packages.
See |packages| and |packages-runtimepath|.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'paragraphs'* *'para'*
'paragraphs' 'para'	string	(default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp")
		global
Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs.  These are pairs
of two letters (see |object-motions|).

					*'patchexpr'* *'pex'*
'patchexpr' 'pex'	string	(default "")
		global
Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
the resulting new version of the file.  See |diff-patchexpr|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E205* *E206*
'patchmode' 'pm'	string	(default "")
		global
When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept.  This can be used
to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
source distribution.  Only the first time that a file is written a
copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
".orig" or ".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work
(Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the
new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible
to write a backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an
empty file is created.
When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
recognized as a compressed file.
Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.

			*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854*
'path' 'pa'		string	(default ".,,")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands,
provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not
starting with "/", "./" or "../").  The directories in the 'path'
option may be relative or absolute.
- Use commas to separate directory names: >vim
	set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
<	- Spaces can also be used to separate directory names.  To have a
  space in a directory name, precede it with an extra backslash, and
  escape the space: >vim
	set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
<	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
  backslash: >vim
	set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
<	- To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >vim
	set path=.
<	- To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
  commas: >vim
	set path=,,
<	- A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
- When using |netrw| URLs can be used.  For example, adding
  "https://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
- Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and
  ";".  See |file-searching| for info and syntax.
- Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >vim
	set path=.,c:\\include
<	  Or just use '/' instead: >vim
	set path=.,c:/include
<	Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
the file!
The maximum length is limited.  How much depends on the system, mostly
it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
'path', see |:checkpath|.
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
uses another default.  To remove the current directory use: >vim
	set path-=
<	To add the current directory use: >vim
	set path+=
<	To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
separator.  Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
names are separated with a semicolon: >vim
	let &path = &path .. "," .. substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
<	Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.

	*'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
'preserveindent' 'pi'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
indent structure as possible.  Normally the indent is replaced by a
series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is
enabled, in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option
means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains
a Tab.
NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
tabs and spaces.  You might not like this.
Also see 'copyindent'.
Use |:retab| to clean up white space.

					*'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
'previewheight' 'pvh'	number	(default 12)
		global
Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.

	*'previewwindow'* *'pvw'* *'nopreviewwindow'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
'previewwindow' 'pvw'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window  |local-noglobal|
Identifies the preview window.  Only one window can have this option
set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
|:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.

					*'pumblend'* *'pb'*
'pumblend' 'pb'		number	(default 0)
		global
Enables pseudo-transparency for the |popup-menu|. Valid values are in
the range of 0 for fully opaque popupmenu (disabled) to 100 for fully
transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.

It is possible to override the level for individual highlights within
the popupmenu using |highlight-blend|. For instance, to enable
transparency but force the current selected element to be fully opaque: >vim

	set pumblend=15
	hi PmenuSel blend=0
<
UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'

						*'pumborder'*
'pumborder'		string	(default "")
		global
Defines the default border style of popupmenu windows. See 'winborder' for
valid values. |hl-PmenuBorder| is used for highlighting the border, and when
style is "shadow" the |hl-PmenuShadow| and |hl-PmenuShadowThrough| groups are used.

					*'pumheight'* *'ph'*
'pumheight' 'ph'	number	(default 0)
		global
Maximum number of items to show in the popup menu
(|ins-completion-menu|). Zero means "use available screen space".

					*'pummaxwidth'* *'pmw'*
'pummaxwidth' 'pmw'	number	(default 0)
		global
Maximum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  When zero,
there is no maximum width limit, otherwise the popup menu will never be
wider than this value.  Truncated text will be indicated by "trunc"
value of 'fillchars' option.

This option takes precedence over 'pumwidth'.

					*'pumwidth'* *'pw'*
'pumwidth' 'pw'		number	(default 15)
		global
Minimum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  If the
cursor column + 'pumwidth' exceeds screen width, the popup menu is
nudged to fit on the screen.

					*'pyxversion'* *'pyx'*
'pyxversion' 'pyx'	number	(default 3)
		global
Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands
|python_x|.  As only Python 3 is supported, this always has the value
`3`. Setting any other value is an error.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

				*'quickfixtextfunc'* *'qftf'*
'quickfixtextfunc' 'qftf'	string	(default "")
		global
This option specifies a function to be used to get the text to display
in the quickfix and location list windows.  This can be used to
customize the information displayed in the quickfix or location window
for each entry in the corresponding quickfix or location list.  See
|quickfix-window-function| for an explanation of how to write the
function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
|lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for more
information.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
evaluating 'qftf' |textlock|.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'quoteescape'* *'qe'*
'quoteescape' 'qe'	string	(default "\")
		local to buffer
The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string.  Used for
objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
the following character will be skipped.  The default value makes the
text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.

			*'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
'readonly' 'ro'		boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer  |local-noglobal|
If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'.  Protects you from
accidentally overwriting a file.  Default on when Vim is started
in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is set for the
newly edited buffer.
See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer.

					*'redrawdebug'* *'rdb'*
'redrawdebug' 'rdb'	string	(default "")
		global
Flags to change the way redrawing works, for debugging purposes.
Most useful with 'writedelay' set to some reasonable value.
Supports the following flags:
    compositor	Indicate each redraw event handled by the compositor
		by briefly flashing the redrawn regions in colors
		indicating the redraw type. These are the highlight
		groups used (and their default colors):
	RedrawDebugNormal   gui=reverse   normal redraw passed through
	RedrawDebugClear    guibg=Yellow  clear event passed through
	RedrawDebugComposed guibg=Green   redraw event modified by the
					  compositor (due to
					  overlapping grids, etc)
	RedrawDebugRecompose guibg=Red    redraw generated by the
					  compositor itself, due to a
					  grid being moved or deleted.
    line	introduce a delay after each line drawn on the screen.
		When using the TUI or another single-grid UI, "compositor"
		gives more information and should be preferred (every
		line is processed as a separate event by the compositor)
    flush	introduce a delay after each "flush" event.
    nothrottle	Turn off throttling of the message grid. This is an
		optimization that joins many small scrolls to one
		larger scroll when drawing the message area (with
		'display' msgsep flag active).
    invalid	Enable stricter checking (abort) of inconsistencies
		of the internal screen state. This is mostly
		useful when running nvim inside a debugger (and
		the test suite).
    nodelta	Send all internally redrawn cells to the UI, even if
		they are unchanged from the already displayed state.

					*'redrawtime'* *'rdt'*
'redrawtime' 'rdt'	number	(default 2000)
		global
Time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  Applies to
'hlsearch', 'inccommand', |:match| highlighting, syntax highlighting,
and async |LanguageTree:parse()|.
When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
matches will be highlighted.
For syntax highlighting the time applies per window.  When over the
limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used.
This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated
pattern.

					*'regexpengine'* *'re'*
'regexpengine' 're'	number	(default 0)
		global
This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines|
The possible values are:
	0	automatic selection
	1	old engine
	2	NFA engine
Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something
that is not supported the pattern will not match.  This is only useful
for debugging the regexp engine.
Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the
default engine becomes too costly.  E.g., when the NFA engine uses too
many states.  This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of
a complex pattern with long text.

	*'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'*
'relativenumber' 'rnu'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of
each line.  Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can
precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without
having to calculate it yourself.  Especially useful in combination
with other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).
When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will
not use the column of line numbers.
The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
number.
When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
characters are put before the number.
See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
the number.

The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of
'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two
options.

						*'report'*
'report'		number	(default 2)
		global
Threshold for reporting number of lines changed.  When the number of
changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
":" commands.  If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
instead of the number of lines.

			*'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
'revins' 'ri'		boolean	(default off)
		global
Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.

			*'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
'rightleft' 'rl'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.

					*'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'*
'rightleftcmd' 'rlc'	string	(default "search")
		local to window
Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
right-to-left mode for a group of commands:

	search		"/" and "?" commands

This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.

				*'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
'ruler' 'ru'		boolean	(default on)
		global
Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
comma.  When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
text in the file is shown on the far right:
	Top	first line is visible
	Bot	last line is visible
	All	first and last line are visible
	45%	relative position in the file
If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
Each window has its own ruler.  If a window has a status line, the
ruler is shown there.  If a window doesn't have a status line and
'cmdheight' is zero, the ruler is not shown.  Otherwise it is shown in
the last line of the screen.  If the statusline is given by
'statusline' (i.e. not empty), this option takes precedence over
'ruler' and 'rulerformat'.
If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multibyte character), both
the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
separated with a dash.
For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.

					*'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
'rulerformat' 'ruf'	string	(default "")
		global
When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

The default ruler width is 17 characters.  To make the ruler 15
characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
Example: >vim
	set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
<

				*'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
'runtimepath' 'rtp'	string	(default "$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim,
                                              $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim,
                                              $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim,
                                              …
                                              $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site,
                                              $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site,
                                              $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site,
                                              …
                                              $VIMRUNTIME,
                                              …
                                              $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site/after,
                                              $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site/after,
                                              $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site/after,
                                              …
                                              $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim/after,
                                              $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim/after,
                                              $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim/after")
		global
List of directories to be searched for these runtime files:
  filetype.lua	filetypes |new-filetype|
  autoload/	automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
  colors/	color scheme files |:colorscheme|
  compiler/	compiler files |:compiler|
  doc/		documentation |write-local-help|
  ftplugin/	filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
  indent/	indent scripts |indent-expression|
  keymap/	key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
  lang/		menu translations |:menutrans|
  lsp/		LSP client configurations |lsp-config|
  lua/		|Lua| plugins
  menu.vim	GUI menus |menu.vim|
  pack/		packages |:packadd|
  parser/	|treesitter| syntax parsers
  plugin/	plugin scripts |write-plugin|
  queries/	|treesitter| queries
  rplugin/	|remote-plugin| scripts
  spell/	spell checking files |spell|
  syntax/	syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
  tutor/	tutorial files |:Tutor|

And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.

Defaults are setup to search these locations:
1. Your home directory, for personal preferences.
   Given by `stdpath("config")`.  |$XDG_CONFIG_HOME|
2. Directories which must contain configuration files according to
   |xdg| ($XDG_CONFIG_DIRS, defaults to /etc/xdg).  This also contains
   preferences from system administrator.
3. Data home directory, for plugins installed by user.
   Given by `stdpath("data")/site`.  |$XDG_DATA_HOME|
4. nvim/site subdirectories for each directory in $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
   This is for plugins which were installed by system administrator,
   but are not part of the Nvim distribution. XDG_DATA_DIRS defaults
   to /usr/local/share/:/usr/share/, so system administrators are
   expected to install site plugins to /usr/share/nvim/site.
5. $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Nvim.
						*after-directory*
6, 7, 8, 9. In after/ subdirectories of 1, 2, 3 and 4, with reverse
   ordering.  This is for preferences to overrule or add to the
   distributed defaults or system-wide settings (rarely needed).

						*packages-runtimepath*
"start" packages will also be searched (|runtime-search-path|) for
runtime files after these, though such packages are not explicitly
reported in &runtimepath. But "opt" packages are explicitly added to
&runtimepath by |:packadd|.

Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
runtime files.  For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
wildcards.
See |:runtime|.
Example: >vim
	set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
<	This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
personal Nvim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim", and finally
"$VIMRUNTIME" (the default runtime files).
You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME to find files which replace
distributed runtime files.  You can put a directory after $VIMRUNTIME
to find files which add to distributed runtime files.

With |--clean| the home directory entries are not included.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'scroll'* *'scr'*
'scroll' 'scr'		number	(default half the window height)
		local to window  |local-noglobal|
Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands.  Will be
set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
changes.  This may happen when enabling the |status-line| or
'tabline' option after setting the 'scroll' option.
If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
be used as the new value for 'scroll'.  Reset to half the window
height with ":set scroll=0".

					*'scrollback'* *'scbk'*
'scrollback' 'scbk'	number	(default 10000)
		local to buffer
Maximum number of lines kept beyond the visible screen. Lines at the
top are deleted if new lines exceed this limit.
Minimum is 1, maximum is 1000000.
Only in |terminal| buffers.

Note: Lines that are not visible and kept in scrollback are not
reflown when the terminal buffer is resized horizontally.

		*'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
'scrollbind' 'scb'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, scrolling the
current window also scrolls other scrollbind windows (windows that
also have this option set).  This option is useful for viewing the
differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
See 'scrollopt' for options that determine how this option should be
interpreted.
This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
file.  This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.

					*'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
'scrolljump' 'sj'	number	(default 1)
		global
Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
screen (e.g., with "j").  Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
CTRL-D).  Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the
percentage of the window height.  Thus -50 scrolls half the window
height.

					*'scrolloff'* *'so'*
'scrolloff' 'so'	number	(default 0)
		global or local to window |global-local|
Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
This will make some context visible around where you are working.  If
you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
when long lines wrap).
After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
these two: >vim
	setlocal scrolloff<
	setlocal scrolloff=-1
<	For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.

					*'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
'scrollopt' 'sbo'	string	(default "ver,jump")
		global
This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
'scrollbind' windows should behave.  'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
Options.
The following words are available:
    ver		Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
    hor		Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
    jump	Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
		scrolling.  This offset is the difference in the first
		displayed line of the bound windows.  When moving
		around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
		reach a position before the start or after the end of
		the buffer.  The offset is not changed though, when
		moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
		to the desired position when possible.
		When now making that window the current one, two
		things can be done with the relative offset:
		1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
		   adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
		   window.  When going back to the other window, the
		   new relative offset will be used.
		2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
		   scrolled to keep the same relative offset.  When
		   going back to the other window, it still uses the
		   same relative offset.
Also see |scroll-binding|.
When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,
even when "ver" isn't there.

					*'sections'* *'sect'*
'sections' 'sect'	string	(default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
		global
Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections.  These are pairs of
two letters (See |object-motions|).  The default makes a section start
at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".

					*'selection'* *'sel'*
'selection' 'sel'	string	(default "inclusive")
		global
This option defines the behavior of the selection.  It is only used
in Visual and Select mode.
Possible values:
   value	past line     inclusive ~
   old		   no		yes
   inclusive	   yes		yes
   exclusive	   yes		no
"past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
character past the line.
"inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
in an operation.  For example, when "x" is used to delete the
selection.
When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past
the end of line the line break still isn't included.
When "exclusive" is used, cursor position in visual mode will be
adjusted for inclusive motions |inclusive-motion-selection-exclusive|.

Note:
- When "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end backwards, you
  cannot include the last character of a line, when starting in Normal
  mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
- when "exclusive" is used with a single character visual selection,
  Vim will behave as if the 'selection' is inclusive (in other words,
  you cannot visually select an empty region).

					*'selectmode'* *'slm'*
'selectmode' 'slm'	string	(default "")
		global
This is a comma-separated list of words, which specifies when to start
Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
Possible values:
   mouse	when using the mouse
   key		when using shifted special keys
   cmd		when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
See |Select-mode|.

				*'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
'sessionoptions' 'ssop'	string	(default "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,tabpages,winsize,terminal")
		global
Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma-
separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
something:
   word		save and restore ~
   blank	empty windows
   buffers	hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
   curdir	the current directory
   folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
		fold options
   globals	global variables that start with an uppercase letter
		and contain at least one lowercase letter.  Only
		String and Number types are stored.
   help		the help window
   localoptions	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
		global values for local options)
   options	all options and mappings (also global values for local
		options)
   skiprtp	exclude 'runtimepath' and 'packpath' from the options
   resize	size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
   sesdir	the directory in which the session file is located
		will become the current directory (useful with
		projects accessed over a network from different
		systems)
   tabpages	all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
		is restored, so that you can make a session for each
		tab page separately
   terminal	include terminal windows where the command can be
		restored
   winpos	position of the whole Vim window
   winsize	window sizes
   slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
   unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.

Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". When neither is included
filenames are stored as absolute paths.
If you leave out "options" many things won't work well after restoring
the session.

				*'shada'* *'sd'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
'shada' 'sd'		string	(default "!,'100,<50,s10,h,r/tmp/,r/private/")
		global
When non-empty, the shada file is read upon startup and written
when exiting Vim (see |shada-file|).  The string should be a comma-
separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
character is left out, then the default value is used for that
parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
the effect of their value.
CHAR	VALUE	~
						*shada-!*
!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
	with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
	letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
	and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
	read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
						*shada-quote*
"	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
	the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
	backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
	start of a comment!
						*shada-%*
%	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
	started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
	restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
	buffer list is restored from the shada file.  Quickfix
	('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on
	removable media (|shada-r|) are not saved.
	When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
	number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
	buffers are stored.
						*shada-'*
'	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
	are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
	'shada' is non-empty.
	If non-zero, then the |jumplist| and the |changelist| are also
	stored in the shada file.
						*shada-/*
/	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
	saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
	patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
	'history' is used.
						*shada-:*
:	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
						*shada-<*
<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
	registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
	saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
	Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in KiB.
						*shada-@*
@	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
						*shada-c*
c	Dummy option, kept for compatibility reasons.  Has no actual
	effect: ShaDa always uses UTF-8 and 'encoding' value is fixed
	to UTF-8 as well.
						*shada-f*
f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
	to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
	non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
	cursor position (when exiting or when doing |:wshada|).
						*shada-h*
h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the shada
	file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
	has been used since the last search command.
						*shada-n*
n	Name of the shada file.  The name must immediately follow
	the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the
	'shadafile' option is set, that file name overrides the one
	given here with 'shada'.  Environment variables are
	expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
						*shada-r*
r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
	',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
	specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
	stored.  This is to avoid removable media.  For Windows you
	could use "ra:,rb:".  You can also use it for temp files,
	e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is ignored.
						*shada-s*
s	Maximum size of an item contents in KiB.  If zero then nothing
	is saved.  Unlike Vim this applies to all items, except for
	the buffer list and header.  Full item size is off by three
	unsigned integers: with `s10` maximum item size may be 1 byte
	(type: 7-bit integer) + 9 bytes (timestamp: up to 64-bit
	integer) + 3 bytes (item size: up to 16-bit integer because
	2^8 < 10240 < 2^16) + 10240 bytes (requested maximum item
	contents size) = 10253 bytes.

Example: >vim
    set shada='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/nvim/shada
<
'50		Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
		edited.
<1000		Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
		remembered.
s100		Items with contents occupying more then 100 KiB are
		skipped.
:0		Command-line history will not be saved.
n~/nvim/shada	The name of the file to use is "~/nvim/shada".
no /		Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
		that is, save all of the search history, and also the
		previous search and substitute patterns.
no %		The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
no h		'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.

When setting 'shada' from an empty value you can use |:rshada| to
load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shadafile'* *'sdf'*
'shadafile' 'sdf'	string	(default "")
		global
When non-empty, overrides the file name used for |shada| (viminfo).
When equal to "NONE" no shada file will be read or written.
This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag.  The |--clean|
command line flag sets it to "NONE".
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
'shell' 'sh'		string	(default $SHELL or "sh", Win32: "cmd.exe")
		global
Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands.  When changing the
value also check these options: 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.  "csh -f".
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.

If the name of the shell contains a space, you need to enclose it in
quotes.  Example with quotes: >vim
	set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
<	Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
each space (to avoid ending the option value), so better use |:let-&|
like this: >vim
	let &shell='"C:\Program Files\unix\sh.exe" -f'
<	Also note that the "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not
part of the command name.
						*shell-unquoting*
Rules regarding quotes:
1. Option is split on space and tab characters that are not inside
   quotes: "abc def" runs shell named "abc" with additional argument
   "def", '"abc def"' runs shell named "abc def" with no additional
   arguments (here and below: additional means “additional to
   'shellcmdflag'”).
2. Quotes in option may be present in any position and any number:
   '"abc"', '"a"bc', 'a"b"c', 'ab"c"' and '"a"b"c"' are all equivalent
   to just "abc".
3. Inside quotes backslash preceding backslash means one backslash.
   Backslash preceding quote means one quote. Backslash preceding
   anything else means backslash and next character literally:
   '"a\\b"' is the same as "a\b", '"a\\"b"' runs shell named literally
   'a"b', '"a\b"' is the same as "a\b" again.
4. Outside of quotes backslash always means itself, it cannot be used
   to escape quote: 'a\"b"' is the same as "a\b".
Note that such processing is done after |:set| did its own round of
unescaping, so to keep yourself sane use |:let-&| like shown above.
						*shell-powershell*
To use PowerShell: >vim
   set noshelltemp
   let &shell = 'powershell'
   let &shellcmdflag = '-NoLogo -NoProfile -ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned -Command '
   let &shellcmdflag .= '[Console]::InputEncoding=[Console]::OutputEncoding=[System.Text.UTF8Encoding]::new();'
   let &shellcmdflag .= '$PSDefaultParameterValues[''Out-File:Encoding'']=''utf8'';'
   let &shellpipe  = '> %s 2>&1'
   set shellquote= shellxquote=
<
						*shell-pwsh*
To use pwsh, use the above settings with `let &shell = 'pwsh'`, and
add: >vim
   let &shellcmdflag .= '$PSStyle.OutputRendering = ''PlainText'';'
   " Workaround (may not be needed in future version of pwsh):
   let $__SuppressAnsiEscapeSequences = 1
<
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'	string	(default "-c"; Windows: "/s /c")
		global
Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
`bash.exe -c ls` or `cmd.exe /s /c "dir"`.  For MS-Windows, the
default is set according to the value of 'shell', to reduce the need
to set this option by the user.
On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
See |shell-unquoting| which talks about separating this option into
multiple arguments.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
'shellpipe' 'sp'	string	(default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
		global
String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
error file.  See also |:make_makeprg|.  See |option-backslash| about
including spaces and backslashes.
The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
of this option).
For MS-Windows the default is "2>&1| tee".  The stdout and stderr are
saved in a file and echoed to the screen.
For Unix the default is "| tee".  The stdout of the compiler is saved
in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
"tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
"bash", "fish", "ash" or "dash" the default becomes "2>&1| tee".  This
means that stderr is also included.  Before using the 'shell' option a
path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh".
The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
explicitly set before.
When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
":make" output will be done.  This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
that writes to 'makeef' by itself.  If you want no piping, but do
want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
become obsolete (at least for Unix).
Note: When using a pipe like "| tee", you'll lose the exit code of the
shell command.  This might be configurable by your shell, look for
the pipefail option (for bash and zsh, use ":set -o pipefail").
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shellquote'* *'shq'*
'shellquote' 'shq'	string	(default ""; Windows, when 'shell'
                                       contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
		global
Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
the "!" and ":!" commands.  The redirection is kept outside of the
quoting.  See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection.  It's
probably not useful to set both options.
This is an empty string by default.  Only known to be useful for
third-party shells on Windows systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted according
the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
user.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shellredir'* *'srr'*
'shellredir' 'srr'	string	(default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
		global
String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
file.  See also |:!|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
and backslashes.
The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
of this option).
The default is ">".  For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh" or
"tcsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&".  If the
'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
"bash" or "fish", the default becomes ">%s 2>&1".  This means that
stderr is also included.  For Win32, the Unix checks are done and
additionally "cmd" is checked for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1".
Also, the same names with ".exe" appended are checked for.
The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
explicitly set before.
In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
become obsolete (at least for Unix).
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

		*'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
'shellslash' 'ssl'	boolean	(default on, Windows: off)
		global
		only modifiable in MS-Windows
When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names.  This is
useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of cmd.exe.  Backward
slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to forward slashes by
Vim.
Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
any file for best results.  This might change in the future.
'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
separator.  To test if this is so use: >vim
	if exists('+shellslash')
<	Also see 'completeslash'.

		*'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'*
'shelltemp' 'stmp'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When on, use temp files for shell commands.  When off use a pipe.
When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
can be detected.
The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
|FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
'shelltemp' is off.
|system()| does not respect this option, it always uses pipes.

					*'shellxescape'* *'sxe'*
'shellxescape' 'sxe'	string	(default "")
		global
When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this
option will be escaped with a '^' character.  This makes it possible
to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
'shellxquote' 'sxq'	string	(default "", Windows: "\"")
		global
Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
to set both options.
When the value is '(' then ')' is appended.  When the value is '"('
then ')"' is appended.
When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

		*'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
'shiftround' 'sr'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'.  Applies to > and <
commands.  CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).

					*'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
'shiftwidth' 'sw'	number	(default 8)
		local to buffer
Number of columns that make up one level of (auto)indentation.  Used
by 'cindent', |<<|, |>>|, etc.
If set to 0, Vim uses the current 'tabstop' value.  Use |shiftwidth()|
to obtain the effective value in scripts.

				*'shortmess'* *'shm'* *E1336*
'shortmess' 'shm'	string	(default "ltToOCF")
		global
This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
It is a list of flags:
 flag	meaning when present	~
  l	use "999L, 888B" instead of "999 lines, 888 bytes"	*shm-l*
  m	use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"			*shm-m*
  r	use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"			*shm-r*
  w	use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message	*shm-w*
	and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
  a	all of the above abbreviations				*shm-a*

  o	overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent	*shm-o*
	message for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when
	'autowrite' on)
  O	message for reading a file overwrites any previous	*shm-O*
	message;  also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn")
  s	don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or	*shm-s*
	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages; when using
	the search count do not show "W" before the count message
	(see |shm-S| below)
  t	truncate file message at the start if it is too long	*shm-t*
	to fit on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most
	column; ignored in Ex mode
  T	truncate other messages in the middle if they are too	*shm-T*
	long to fit on the command line; "..." will appear in the
	middle; ignored in Ex mode
  W	don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file	*shm-W*
  A	don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing	*shm-A*
	swap file is found
  I	don't give the intro message when starting Vim,		*shm-I*
	see |:intro|
  c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages; for		*shm-c*
	example, "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only
	match", "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
  C	don't give messages while scanning for ins-completion	*shm-C*
	items, for instance "scanning tags"
  q	do not show "recording @a" when recording a macro	*shm-q*
  F	don't give the file info when editing a file, like	*shm-F*
	`:silent` was used for the command; note that this also
	affects messages from 'autoread' reloading
  S	do not show search count message when searching, e.g.	*shm-S*
	"[1/5]".  When the "S" flag is not present (e.g. search count
	is shown), the "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" and
	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages are only
	indicated by a "W" (Mnemonic: Wrapped) letter before the
	search count statistics.  The maximum limit can be set with
	the 'maxsearchcount' option, see also |searchcount()|
	function.

This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
possible for the space available.  To get the whole message that you
would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
Useful values:
    shm=	No abbreviation of message.
    shm=a	Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
    shm=at	Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.

				*'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
'showbreak' 'sbr'	string	(default "")
		global or local to window |global-local|
String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
values are "> " or "+++ ": >vim
	let &showbreak = "> "
	let &showbreak = '+++ '
<	Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
The |hl-NonText| highlight group determines the highlighting.
Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
"n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
A window-local value overrules a global value.  If the global value is
set and you want no value in the current window use NONE: >vim
	setlocal showbreak=NONE
<

			*'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
'showcmd' 'sc'		boolean	(default on)
		global
Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen.  Set this
option off if your terminal is slow.
In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
- When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
  If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"
  means two characters and six bytes.
- When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
- When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:
  {lines}x{columns}.
This information can be displayed in an alternative location using the
'showcmdloc' option, useful when 'cmdheight' is 0.

					*'showcmdloc'* *'sloc'*
'showcmdloc' 'sloc'	string	(default "last")
		global
This option can be used to display the (partially) entered command in
another location.  Possible values are:
  last		Last line of the screen (default).
  statusline	Status line of the current window.
  tabline	First line of the screen if 'showtabline' is enabled.
Setting this option to "statusline" or "tabline" means that these will
be redrawn whenever the command changes, which can be on every key
pressed.
The %S 'statusline' item can be used in 'statusline' or 'tabline' to
place the text.  Without a custom 'statusline' or 'tabline' it will be
displayed in a convenient location.

		*'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
'showfulltag' 'sft'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
pattern (if there is one) as possible matches.  Thus, if you have
matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
required (coding style permitting).
Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in
'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not
match the typed text.

			*'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
'showmatch' 'sm'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one.  The
jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
seen or not).
When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
blinking when showing the match.
The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
matches.
Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving
around |pi_paren.txt|.
Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.

			*'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
'showmode' 'smd'	boolean	(default on)
		global
If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
The |hl-ModeMsg| highlight group determines the highlighting.
The option has no effect when 'cmdheight' is zero.

					*'showtabline'* *'stal'*
'showtabline' 'stal'	number	(default 1)
		global
The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels
will be displayed:
	0: never
	1: only if there are at least two tab pages
	2: always
This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages
line.
See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages.

					*'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
'sidescroll' 'ss'	number	(default 1)
		global
The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally.  Used only when
the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0.  Not used
for "zh" and "zl" commands.

				*'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
'sidescrolloff' 'siso'	number	(default 0)
		global or local to window |global-local|
The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set.  Setting this option to a
value greater than 0 while having 'sidescroll' also at a non-zero
value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
horizontally (except at beginning of the line).  Setting this option
to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor
horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too
close to the beginning of the line.
After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
these two: >vim
	setlocal sidescrolloff<
	setlocal sidescrolloff=-1
<
Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as in the
	 following example to never allow the cursor to move onto the
	 "extends" character: >vim

	 set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
	 set sidescrolloff=1
<

					*'signcolumn'* *'scl'*
'signcolumn' 'scl'	string	(default "auto")
		local to window
When and how to draw the signcolumn.  Valid values are:
   "auto"	only when there is a sign to display
   "auto:[1-9]" resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
		given number (maximum 9), e.g. "auto:4"
   "auto:[1-8]-[2-9]"
		resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
		given maximum number (maximum 9) while keeping
		at least the given minimum (maximum 8) fixed
		space. The minimum number should always be less
		than the maximum number, e.g. "auto:2-5"
   "no"		never
   "yes"	always
   "yes:[1-9]"  always, with fixed space for signs up to the given
		number (maximum 9), e.g. "yes:3"
   "number"	display signs in the 'number' column.  If the number
		column is not present, then behaves like "auto".

		*'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
'smartcase' 'scs'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
":g" and ":s" and when filtering matches for the completion menu
|compl-states|.
Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After "*" and "#" you
can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, recalling the search
pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.

		*'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
'smartindent' 'si'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line.  Works for C-like
programs, but can also be used for other languages.  'cindent' does
something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
see |C-indenting|.  When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set,
setting 'si' has no effect.  'indentexpr' is a more advanced
alternative.
Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
An indent is automatically inserted:
- After a line ending in "{".
- After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
- Before a line starting with "}" (only with the "O" command).
When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
given the same indent as the matching "{".
When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column.  The indent
is restored for the next line.  If you don't want this, use this
mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
right.

			*'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
'smarttab' 'sta'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When enabled, the <Tab> key will indent by 'shiftwidth' if the cursor
is in leading whitespace.  The <BS> key has the opposite effect.
In leading whitespace, this has the same effect as setting
'softtabstop' to the value of 'shiftwidth'.
NOTE: in most cases, using 'softtabstop' is a better option.  Have a
look at section |30.5| of the user guide for detailed
explanations on how Vim works with tabs and spaces.

		*'smoothscroll'* *'sms'* *'nosmoothscroll'* *'nosms'*
'smoothscroll' 'sms'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
Scrolling works with screen lines.  When 'wrap' is set and the first
line in the window wraps part of it may not be visible, as if it is
above the window.  "<<<" is displayed at the start of the first line,
highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
You may also want to add "lastline" to the 'display' option to show as
much of the last line as possible.
NOTE: partly implemented, doesn't work yet for |gj| and |gk|.

					*'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
'softtabstop' 'sts'	number	(default 0)
		local to buffer
Create soft tab stops, separated by 'softtabstop' number of columns.
In Insert mode, pressing the <Tab> key will move the cursor to the
next soft tab stop, instead of inserting a literal tab.  <BS> behaves
similarly in reverse.  Vim inserts a minimal mix of tab and space
characters to produce the visual effect.

This setting does not affect the display of existing tab characters.

A value of 0 disables this behaviour.  A negative value makes Vim use
'shiftwidth'.  If you plan to use 'sts' and 'shiftwidth' with
different values, you might consider setting 'smarttab'.

The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' alters tab behavior when 'list' is
enabled.  See also |ins-expandtab| and user manual section |30.5| for
in-depth explanations.

The value of 'softtabstop' will be ignored if 'varsofttabstop' is set
to anything other than an empty string.

					*'spell'* *'nospell'*
'spell'			boolean	(default off)
		local to window
When on spell checking will be done.  See |spell|.
The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.

					*'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'*
'spellcapcheck' 'spc'	string	(default "[.?!]\_[\])'"\t ]\+")
		local to buffer
Pattern to locate the end of a sentence.  The following word will be
checked to start with a capital letter.  If not then it is highlighted
with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled).
When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
Only used when 'spell' is set.
Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
including spaces and backslashes.
To set this option automatically depending on the language, see
|set-spc-auto|.

					*'spellfile'* *'spf'*
'spellfile' 'spf'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
commands.  It must end in ".{encoding}.add".  You need to include the
path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
The path may include characters from 'isfname', ' ', ',', '@' and ':'.
							*E765*
It may also be a comma-separated list of names.  A count before the
|zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
a personal word list file and a project word list file.
When a word is added while this option is empty Nvim will use
(and auto-create) `stdpath('data')/site/spell/`. For the file name the
first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, ignoring the
region.
The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
have to appear in 'spelllang'.
Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
name if you want to.  However, it will then only be used when
'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
without region name will be found.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'spelllang'* *'spl'*
'spelllang' 'spl'	string	(default "en")
		local to buffer
A comma-separated list of word list names.  When the 'spell' option is
on spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >vim
	set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
<	This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized.  Words
that are not recognized will be highlighted.
The word list name must consist of alphanumeric characters, a dash or
an underscore.  It should not include a comma or dot.  Using a dash is
recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
specification.  Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
Britain.  (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than
en_ca, en_gb and en_us).
If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from
spell checking.  This is useful when editing text that also has Asian
words.
Note that the "medical" dictionary does not exist, it is just an
example of a longer name.
						*E757*
As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is.  The
first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
(_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
This is mainly for testing purposes.  You must make sure the correct
encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.

If the |spellfile.lua| plugin is active and you use a language name
for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin
will ask you if you want to download the file.

After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files
"spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'.  "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'
up to the first character that is not an ASCII letter or number and
not a dash.  Also see |set-spc-auto|.

					*'spelloptions'* *'spo'*
'spelloptions' 'spo'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
A comma-separated list of options for spell checking:
camel		When a word is CamelCased, assume "Cased" is a
		separate word: every upper-case character in a word
		that comes after a lower case character indicates the
		start of a new word.
noplainbuffer	Only spellcheck a buffer when 'syntax' is enabled,
		or when extmarks are set within the buffer. Only
		designated regions of the buffer are spellchecked in
		this case.

					*'spellsuggest'* *'sps'*
'spellsuggest' 'sps'	string	(default "best")
		global
Methods used for spelling suggestions.  Both for the |z=| command and
the |spellsuggest()| function.  This is a comma-separated list of
items:

best		Internal method that works best for English.  Finds
		changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
		scoring to improve the ordering.

double		Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
		results.  The first method is "fast", the other method
		computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
		word.  That only works when the language specifies
		sound folding.  Can be slow and doesn't always give
		better results.

fast		Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
		character inserts/deletes/swaps.  Works well for
		simple typing mistakes.

{number}	The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|.
		Not used for |spellsuggest()|.  The number of
		suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'
		minus two.

timeout:{millisec}   Limit the time searching for suggestions to
		{millisec} milliseconds.  Applies to the following
		methods.  When omitted the limit is 5000.  When
		negative there is no limit.

file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
		separated by a slash.  The first column contains the
		bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
		Example:
			theribal/terrible ~
		Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
		top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
		Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
		comments.
		The word in the second column must be correct,
		otherwise it will not be used.  Add the word to an
		".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling
		mistake.
		The file is used for all languages.

expr:{expr}	Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
		trouble with spaces.  Best is to call a function
		without arguments, see |expr-option-function|.
		|v:val| holds the badly spelled word.  The expression
		must evaluate to a List of Lists, each with a
		suggestion and a score.
		Example:
			[['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~
		Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the
		internal methods use.  A lower score is better.
		This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
		set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
		Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
		'verbose' option to a non-zero value.

Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used.  The others may
appear several times in any order.  Example: >vim
	set sps=file:~/.config/nvim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
<	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

		*'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
'splitbelow' 'sb'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
one. |:split|

					*'splitkeep'* *'spk'*
'splitkeep' 'spk'	string	(default "cursor")
		global
The value of this option determines the scroll behavior when opening,
closing or resizing horizontal splits.

Possible values are:
  cursor	Keep the same relative cursor position.
  screen	Keep the text on the same screen line.
  topline	Keep the topline the same.

For the "screen" and "topline" values, the cursor position will be
changed when necessary.  In this case, the jumplist will be populated
with the previous cursor position.  For "screen", the text cannot
always be kept on the same screen line when 'wrap' is enabled.

		*'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
'splitright' 'spr'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
current one. |:vsplit|

		*'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
'startofline' 'sol'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
non-blank of the line.  When off the cursor is kept in the same column
(if possible).  This applies to the commands:
- CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", "gg"
- "d", "<<", "==" and ">>" with a linewise operator
  (|operator-resulting-pos|)
- "%" with a count
- buffer changing commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.)
- Ex commands that only have a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
where it was the last time the buffer was edited.

					*'statuscolumn'* *'stc'*
'statuscolumn' 'stc'	string	(default "")
		local to window
When non-empty, this option determines the content of the area to the
side of a window, normally containing the fold, sign and number columns.
The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.

Some of the items from the 'statusline' format are different for
'statuscolumn':

%l	line number column for currently drawn line
%s	sign column for currently drawn line
%C	fold column for currently drawn line

The 'statuscolumn' width follows that of the default columns and
adapts to the 'numberwidth', 'signcolumn' and 'foldcolumn' option values
(regardless of whether the sign and fold items are present).
Additionally, the 'statuscolumn' grows with the size of the evaluated
format string, up to a point (following the maximum size of the default
fold, sign and number columns). Shrinking only happens when the number
of lines in a buffer changes, or the 'statuscolumn' option is set.

The |v:lnum|    variable holds the line number to be drawn.
The |v:relnum|  variable holds the relative line number to be drawn.
The |v:virtnum| variable is negative when drawing virtual lines, zero
	      when drawing the actual buffer line, and positive when
	      drawing the wrapped part of a buffer line.

When using |v:relnum|, keep in mind that cursor movement by itself will
not cause the 'statuscolumn' to update unless 'relativenumber' is set.

NOTE: The %@ click execute function item is supported as well but the
specified function will be the same for each row in the same column.
It cannot be switched out through a dynamic 'statuscolumn' format, the
handler should be written with this in mind.

Examples: >vim
	" Line number with bar separator and click handlers:
	set statuscolumn=%@SignCb@%s%=%T%@NumCb@%l│%T

	" Line numbers in hexadecimal for non wrapped part of lines:
	let &stc='%=%{v:virtnum>0?"":printf("%x",v:lnum)} '

	" Human readable line numbers with thousands separator:
	let &stc='%{substitute(v:lnum,"\\d\\zs\\ze\\'
		   . '%(\\d\\d\\d\\)\\+$",",","g")}'

	" Both relative and absolute line numbers with different
	" highlighting for odd and even relative numbers:
	let &stc='%#NonText#%{&nu?v:lnum:""}' .
	 '%=%{&rnu&&(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}' .
	 '%#LineNr#%{&rnu&&!(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}'

<	WARNING: this expression is evaluated for each screen line so defining
an expensive expression can negatively affect render performance.

				*'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E542*
'statusline' 'stl'	string	(default is very long)
		global or local to window |global-local|
Sets the |status-line|.

The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
normal text.  Each status line item is of the form:
  %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
All fields except the {item} are optional.  A single percent sign can
be given as "%%".

						*stl-%!*
When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,
evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >vim
	set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
<	The *g:statusline_winid* variable will be set to the |window-ID| of the
window that the status line belongs to.
The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
context of the window that the statusline belongs to.

When there is an error while evaluating the option it will be reset to
its default value to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating
would loop.  When the result contains unprintable characters the
result is unpredictable.

Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
'laststatus' is 2 or 3) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.

field	    meaning ~
-	    Left justify the item.  The default is right justified
	    when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
0	    Leading zeroes in numeric items.  Overridden by "-".
minwid	    Minimum width of the item, padding as set by "-" & "0".
	    Value must be 50 or less.
maxwid	    Maximum width of the item.  Truncation occurs with a "<"
	    on the left for text items.  Numeric items will be
	    shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by ">"number
	    where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
	    an exponential notation.
item	    A one letter code as described below.

Following is a description of the possible statusline items.  The
second character in "item" is the type:
	N for number
	S for string
	F for flags as described below
	- not applicable

item  meaning ~
f S   Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current
      directory.
F S   Full path to the file in the buffer.
t S   File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
m F   Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
M F   Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
r F   Readonly flag, text is "[RO]".
R F   Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
h F   Help buffer flag, text is "[help]".
H F   Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
w F   Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]".
W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
      being used: "<keymap>"
n N   Buffer number.
b N   Value of character under cursor.
B N   As above, in hexadecimal.
o N   Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
      Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
O N   As above, in hexadecimal.
l N   Line number.
L N   Number of lines in buffer.
c N   Column number (byte index).
v N   Virtual column number (screen column).
V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.  Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
      percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length, unless
      translated.
S S   'showcmd' content, see 'showcmdloc'.
a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
      Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
{ NF  Evaluate expression between "%{" and "}" and substitute result.
      Note that there is no "%" before the closing "}".  The
      expression cannot contain a "}" character, call a function to
      work around that.  See |stl-%{| below.
`{%` -  This is almost same as "{" except the result of the expression is
      re-evaluated as a statusline format string.  Thus if the
      return value of expr contains "%" items they will get expanded.
      The expression can contain the "}" character, the end of
      expression is denoted by "%}".
      For example: >vim
	func! Stl_filename() abort
	    return "%t"
	endfunc
<	        `stl=%{Stl_filename()}`   results in `"%t"`
        `stl=%{%Stl_filename()%}` results in `"Name of current file"`
%} -  End of "{%" expression
( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
      alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
T N   For 'tabline': start of tab page N label.  Use %T or %X to end
      the label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button switches
      to the specified tab page, while clicking it with middle mouse
      button closes the specified tab page.
X N   For 'tabline': start of close tab N label.  Use %X or %T to end
      the label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X.  Use %999X for a "close current
      tab" label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button closes
      the specified tab page.
@ N   Start of execute function label. Use %X or %T to end the label,
      e.g.: %10@SwitchBuffer@foo.c%X.  Clicking this label runs the
      specified function: in the example when clicking once using left
      mouse button on "foo.c", a `SwitchBuffer(10, 1, 'l', '    ')`
      expression will be run.  The specified function receives the
      following arguments in order:
      1. minwid field value or zero if no N was specified
      2. number of mouse clicks to detect multiple clicks
      3. mouse button used: "l", "r" or "m" for left, right or middle
         button respectively; one should not rely on third argument
         being only "l", "r" or "m": any other non-empty string value
         that contains only ASCII lower case letters may be expected
         for other mouse buttons
      4. modifiers pressed: string which contains "s" if shift
         modifier was pressed, "c" for control, "a" for alt and "m"
         for meta; currently if modifier is not pressed string
         contains space instead, but one should not rely on presence
         of spaces or specific order of modifiers: use |stridx()| to
         test whether some modifier is present; string is guaranteed
         to contain only ASCII letters and spaces, one letter per
         modifier; "?" modifier may also be present, but its presence
         is a bug that denotes that new mouse button recognition was
         added without modifying code that reacts on mouse clicks on
         this label.
      Use |getmousepos()|.winid in the specified function to get the
      corresponding window id of the clicked item.
< -   Where to truncate line if too long.  Default is at the start.
      No width fields allowed.
= -   Separation point between alignment sections.  Each section will
      be separated by an equal number of spaces.  With one %= what
      comes after it will be right-aligned.  With two %= there is a
      middle part, with white space left and right of it.
      No width fields allowed.
# -   Set highlight group.  The name must follow and then a # again.
      Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname.  The same
      highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current
      windows.
$ -   Same as `#`, except the `%$HLname$` group will inherit from
      preceding highlight attributes.
* -   Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
      minwid field, e.g. %1*.  Restore normal highlight with %* or
      %0*.  The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be
      applied to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current
      windows.
      The number N must be between 1 and 9.  See |hl-User1..9|

When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when
that flag comes right after plaintext.  This will make a nice display
when flags are used like in the examples below.

When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are
not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >vim
	set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
<	Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
line is displayed.
			*stl-%{* *g:actual_curbuf* *g:actual_curwin*
While evaluating %{} the current buffer and current window will be set
temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
currently being drawn.  The expression will evaluate in this context.
The variable "g:actual_curbuf" is set to the `bufnr()` number of the
real current buffer and "g:actual_curwin" to the |window-ID| of the
real current window.  These values are strings.

The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.

If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
using `:redrawstatus`.

A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
described above.

Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
edit your vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right.

Examples:
Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >vim
  set statusline=%<%f\ %h%w%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
<	Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >vim
  set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
<	Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >vim
  set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
  hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
<	Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >vim
  set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
<	In the |:autocmd|'s: >vim
  let b:gzflag = 1
<	And: >vim
  unlet b:gzflag
<	And define this function: >vim
  function VarExists(var, val)
      if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
  endfunction
<

					*'suffixes'* *'su'*
'suffixes' 'su'		string	(default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
		global
Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
match a wildcard.  See |suffixes|.  Commas can be used to separate the
suffixes.  Spaces after the comma are ignored.  A dot is also seen as
the start of a suffix.  To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
including spaces and backslashes).
See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
suffixes from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
uses another default.

					*'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
'suffixesadd' 'sua'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Comma-separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands.  Example: >vim
	set suffixesadd=.java
<

			*'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
'swapfile' 'swf'	boolean	(default on)
		local to buffer
Use a swapfile for the buffer.  This option can be reset when a
swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer.  For example, with
confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
Careful: All text will be in memory:
	- Don't use this for big files.
	- Recovery will be impossible!
A swapfile will only be present when 'updatecount' is non-zero and
'swapfile' is set.
When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
Also see |swap-file|.
If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,
use the |:noswapfile| modifier.
See 'directory' for where the swap file is created.

This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

					*'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
'switchbuf' 'swb'	string	(default "uselast")
		global
This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
This option is checked, when
- jumping to errors with the |quickfix| commands (|:cc|, |:cn|, |:cp|,
  etc.).
- jumping to a tag using the |:stag| command.
- opening a file using the |CTRL-W_f| or |CTRL-W_F| command.
- jumping to a buffer using a buffer split command (e.g.  |:sbuffer|,
  |:sbnext|, or |:sbrewind|).
Possible values (comma-separated list):
   useopen	If included, jump to the first open window in the
		current tab page that contains the specified buffer
		(if there is one).  Otherwise: Do not examine other
		windows.
   usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
		pages.
   split	If included, split the current window before loading
		a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
		Otherwise: do not split, use current window (when used
		in the quickfix window: the previously used window or
		split if there is no other window).
   vsplit	Just like "split" but split vertically.
   newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
		"split" when both are present.
   uselast	If included, jump to the previously used window when
		jumping to errors with |quickfix| commands.
If a window has 'winfixbuf' enabled, 'switchbuf' is currently not
applied to the split window.

					*'synmaxcol'* *'smc'*
'synmaxcol' 'smc'	number	(default 3000)
		local to buffer
Maximum column in which to search for syntax items.  In long lines the
text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
long line.
Set to zero to remove the limit.

					*'syntax'* *'syn'*
'syntax' 'syn'		string	(default "")
		local to buffer  |local-noglobal|
When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
b:current_syntax variable does).
This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file: >c
	/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
<	When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
names.  Example: >c
	/* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */
<	This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.
Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,
otherwise it will be skipped.  More than one dot may appear.
To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >vim
	set syntax=OFF
<	To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
'filetype' option: >vim
	set syntax=ON
<	What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
Only alphanumeric characters, '.', '-' and '_' can be used.

					*'tabclose'* *'tcl'*
'tabclose' 'tcl'	string	(default "")
		global
This option controls the behavior when closing tab pages (e.g., using
|:tabclose|).  When empty Vim goes to the next (right) tab page.

Possible values (comma-separated list):
   left		If included, go to the previous tab page instead of
		the next one.
   uselast	If included, go to the previously used tab page if
		possible.  This option takes precedence over the
		others.

					*'tabline'* *'tal'*
'tabline' 'tal'		string	(default "")
		global
When non-empty, this option determines the content of the tab pages
line at the top of the Vim window.  When empty Vim will use a default
tab pages line.  See |setting-tabline| for more info.

The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'
option and only when there is no GUI tab line.  When 'e' is in
'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used
instead.  Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.

The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'.  You can use
|tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out
the text to be displayed.  Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for
the second one, etc.  Use "%X" items for closing labels.

When changing something that is used in 'tabline' that does not
trigger it to be updated, use |:redrawtabline|.
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others
are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.

					*'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'*
'tabpagemax' 'tpm'	number	(default 50)
		global
Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|

					*'tabstop'* *'ts'*
'tabstop' 'ts'		number	(default 8)
		local to buffer
Defines the column multiple used to display the Horizontal Tab
character (ASCII 9); a Horizontal Tab always advances to the next tab
stop.
The value must be at least 1 and at most 9999.
If 'vartabstop' is set, this option is ignored.
Leave it at 8 unless you have a strong reason (see usr |30.5|).

		*'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
'tagbsearch' 'tbs'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file.  Binary
searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
they are not sorted.  Only when this is not the case does the
'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.

When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
files.  In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
certain files, or retry all files with a linear search.  When
'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.

Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
   !_TAG_FILE_SORTED	0	/some comment/
<	[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]

When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used
instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
be found in the retry.

If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
linear search can be avoided when case is ignored.  Use a value of '2'
in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be case-fold
sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command:
"sort -f -o tags tags".  For Universal ctags and Exuberant ctags
version 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be
used for this as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for
this to work.

By default, tag searches are case-sensitive.  Case is ignored when
'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
"ignore".
Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or
'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase
characters.

When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
must be included in the tags file.
This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
command-line completion and ":help").

					*'tagcase'* *'tc'*
'tagcase' 'tc'		string	(default "followic")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags
file:
   followic	Follow the 'ignorecase' option
   followscs    Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options
   ignore	Ignore case
   match	Match case
   smart	Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used

					*'tagfunc'* *'tfu'*
'tagfunc' 'tfu'		string	(default "")
		local to buffer
This option specifies a function to be used to perform tag searches
(including |taglist()|).
The function gets the tag pattern and should return a List of matching
tags.  See |tag-function| for an explanation of how to write the
function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
|lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for more
information.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'taglength'* *'tl'*
'taglength' 'tl'	number	(default 0)
		global
If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.

		*'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
'tagrelative' 'tr'	boolean	(default on)
		global
If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that
tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.

					*'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
'tags' 'tag'		string	(default "./tags;,tags")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas.  To
include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with backslashes
(see |option-backslash| about including spaces/commas and backslashes).
When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
of the current file.  But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
|tags-option|.
"*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will
find all files named "tags" below "/lib".  The filename itself cannot
contain wildcards, it is used as-is.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find
files called "tags?".
The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
actually used.
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
file names from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
uses another default.

		*'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
'tagstack' 'tgst'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When on, the |tagstack| is used normally.  When off, a ":tag" or
":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
tagstack.  A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
mapping which should not change the tagstack.

		*'termbidi'* *'tbidi'* *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
'termbidi' 'tbidi'	boolean	(default off)
		global
The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
by Unicode).  The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
For further details see |l10n-arabic.txt|.

	*'termguicolors'* *'tgc'* *'notermguicolors'* *'notgc'*
'termguicolors' 'tgc'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Enables 24-bit RGB color in the |TUI|.  Uses "gui" |:highlight|
attributes instead of "cterm" attributes. |guifg|
Requires an ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal.

Nvim will automatically attempt to determine if the host terminal
supports 24-bit color and will enable this option if it does
(unless explicitly disabled by the user).

				*'termpastefilter'* *'tpf'*
'termpastefilter' 'tpf'	string	(default "BS,HT,ESC,DEL")
		global
A comma-separated list of options for specifying control characters
to be removed from the text pasted into the terminal window. The
supported values are:

   BS	    Backspace

   HT	    TAB

   FF	    Form feed

   ESC	    Escape

   DEL	    DEL

   C0	    Other control characters, excluding Line feed and
	    Carriage return < ' '

   C1	    Control characters 0x80...0x9F

				*'termsync'* *'notermsync'*
'termsync'		boolean	(default on)
		global
If the host terminal supports it, buffer all screen updates
made during a redraw cycle so that each screen is displayed in
the terminal all at once. This can prevent tearing or flickering
when the terminal updates faster than Nvim can redraw.

					*'textwidth'* *'tw'*
'textwidth' 'tw'	number	(default 0)
		local to buffer
Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
this.
When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.

					*'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
'thesaurus' 'tsr'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.  See
|compl-thesaurus|.

This option is not used if 'thesaurusfunc' is set, either for the
buffer or globally.

To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.  The use of
|:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories
from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version uses
another default.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.

				*'thesaurusfunc'* *'tsrfu'*
'thesaurusfunc' 'tsrfu'	string	(default "")
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
This option specifies a function to be used for thesaurus completion
with CTRL-X CTRL-T.  |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T| See |compl-thesaurusfunc|.
The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
See |option-value-function| for more information.

This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

			*'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
'tildeop' 'top'		boolean	(default off)
		global
When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.

			*'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
'timeout' 'to'		boolean	(default on)
		global
This option and 'timeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
mapped key sequence has been received. For example, if <c-f> is
pressed and 'timeout' is set, Nvim will wait 'timeoutlen' milliseconds
for any key that can follow <c-f> in a mapping.

					*'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
'timeoutlen' 'tm'	number	(default 1000)
		global
Time in milliseconds to wait for a mapped sequence to complete.

					*'title'* *'notitle'*
'title'			boolean	(default off)
		global
When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
	filename [+=-] (path) - Nvim
Where:
	filename	the name of the file being edited
	-		indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
	+		indicates the file was modified
	=		indicates the file is read-only
	=+		indicates the file is read-only and modified
	(path)		is the path of the file being edited
	- Nvim		the server name |v:servername| or "Nvim"

						*'titlelen'*
'titlelen'		number	(default 85)
		global
Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
title.  When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
shown.  A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window.  But
it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
bar.  When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used.  Otherwise,
values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.

						*'titleold'*
'titleold'		string	(default "")
		global
If not empty, this option will be used to set the window title when
exiting.  Only if 'title' is enabled.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

						*'titlestring'*
'titlestring'		string	(default "")
		global
When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
window.  This happens only when the 'title' option is on.

When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  If it contains
an invalid '%' format, the value is used as-is and no error or warning
will be given when the value is set.

The default behaviour is equivalent to: >vim
    set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ \(%{expand(\"%:~:h\")}\)%)%a\ -\ Nvim
<
This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

Example: >vim
    auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() .. "/" .. expand("%:p")
    set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
<	The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
of the available space.
Some people prefer to have the file name first: >vim
    set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
<	Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
without the file name.  The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
separating space only when needed.
NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).

				*'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
'ttimeout'		boolean	(default on)
		global
This option and 'ttimeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
key code sequence has been received by the |TUI|.

For example if <Esc> (the \x1b byte) is received and 'ttimeout' is
set, Nvim waits 'ttimeoutlen' milliseconds for the terminal to
complete a key code sequence. If no input arrives before the timeout,
a single <Esc> is assumed. Many TUI cursor key codes start with <Esc>.

On very slow systems this may fail, causing cursor keys not to work
sometimes.  If you discover this problem you can ":set ttimeoutlen=9999".
Nvim will wait for the next character to arrive after an <Esc>.

					*'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm'	number	(default 50)
		global
Time in milliseconds to wait for a key code sequence to complete. Also
used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G when part of a command has
been typed.

				*'undodir'* *'udir'* *E5003*
'undodir' 'udir'	string	(default "$XDG_STATE_HOME/nvim/undo//")
		global
List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.
See 'backupdir' for details of the format.
"." means using the directory of the file.  The undo file name for
"file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".
For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited
file, with path separators replaced with "%".
When writing: The first directory that exists is used.  "." always
works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.  If none of
the directories exist Nvim will attempt to create the last directory in
the list.
When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file.  The first
undo file that exists is used.  When it cannot be read an error is
given, no further entry is used.
See |undo-persistence|.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

Note that unlike 'directory' and 'backupdir', 'undodir' always acts as
though the trailing slashes are present (see 'backupdir' for what this
means).

			*'undofile'* *'udf'* *'noundofile'* *'noudf'*
'undofile' 'udf'	boolean	(default off)
		local to buffer
When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when
writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same
file on buffer read.
The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.
For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
before a reload to be saved for undo.
When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.

					*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
'undolevels' 'ul'	number	(default 1000)
		global or local to buffer |global-local|
Maximum number of changes that can be undone.  Since undo information
is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used.
Nevertheless, a single change can already use a large amount of
memory.  Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u"
undoes itself: >vim
	set ul=0
<	But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
Also see |undo-two-ways|.
Set to -1 for no undo at all.  You might want to do this only for the
current buffer: >vim
	setlocal ul=-1
<	This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.

The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used.

Also see |clear-undo|.

					*'undoreload'* *'ur'*
'undoreload' 'ur'	number	(default 10000)
		global
Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
Vim. |FileChangedShell|
The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number
of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.

When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.

Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory.  Set
this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.

					*'updatecount'* *'uc'*
'updatecount' 'uc'	number	(default 200)
		global
After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
disk.  When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
recovery |crash-recovery|).  'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|.  When editing in readonly
mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with 'swapfile'.
When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set.  When 'updatecount'
is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
This option has no meaning in buffers where 'buftype' is "nofile" or
"nowrite".

					*'updatetime'* *'ut'*
'updatetime' 'ut'	number	(default 4000)
		global
If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
written to disk (see |crash-recovery|).  Also used for the
|CursorHold| autocommand event.

				*'varsofttabstop'* *'vsts'*
'varsofttabstop' 'vsts'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Defines variable-width soft tab stops.  The value is a comma-separated
list of widths in columns.  Each width defines the number of columns
before the next soft tab stop.  The last value repeats indefinitely.

For example, when editing assembly language files where statements
start in the 9th column and comments in the 41st, it may be useful
to use the following: >vim
	set varsofttabstop=8,32,8
<	This sets soft tab stops at column 8, then at column 40 (8 + 32), and
every 8 columns thereafter.

Note: this setting overrides 'softtabstop'.
See section |30.5| of the user manual for detailed explanations on how
Vim works with tabs and spaces.

					*'vartabstop'* *'vts'*
'vartabstop' 'vts'	string	(default "")
		local to buffer
Defines variable-width tab stops.  The value is a comma-separated list
of widths in columns.  Each width defines the number of columns before
the next tab stop; the last value repeats indefinitely.

For example: >
	:set vartabstop=4,8
<	This places the first tab stop 4 columns from the start of the line
and each subsequent tab stop 8 columns apart.

Note: this setting overrides 'tabstop'.
On UNIX, it is recommended to keep the default tabstop value of 8.
Consider setting 'varsofttabstop' instead.
See section |30.5| of the user manual for detailed explanations on how
Vim works with tabs and spaces.

					*'verbose'* *'vbs'*
'verbose' 'vbs'		number	(default 0)
		global
Sets the verbosity level.  Also set by |-V| and |:verbose|.

Tracing of assignments to options, mappings, etc. in Lua scripts is
enabled at level 1; Lua scripts are not traced when 'verbose' is 0,
for performance.

If greater than or equal to a given level, Nvim produces the following
messages:

Level   Messages ~
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1	Enables Lua tracing (see above). Does not produce messages.
2	When a file is ":source"'ed, or |shada| file is read or written.
3	UI info, terminal capabilities.
4	Shell commands.
5	Every searched tags file and include file.
8	Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
9	Executed autocommands.
11	Finding items in a path.
12	Vimscript function calls.
13	When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
14	Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
15	Ex commands from a script (truncated at 200 characters).
16	Ex commands.

If 'verbosefile' is set then the verbose messages are not displayed.

					*'verbosefile'* *'vfile'*
'verbosefile' 'vfile'	string	(default "")
		global
When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
When the file exists messages are appended.
Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
empty.  Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.
Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
'viewdir' 'vdir'	string	(default "$XDG_STATE_HOME/nvim/view//")
		global
Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

					*'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
'viewoptions' 'vop'	string	(default "folds,cursor,curdir")
		global
Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma-separated
list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring something:
   word		save and restore ~
   cursor	cursor position in file and in window
   curdir	local current directory, if set with |:lcd|
   folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
		fold options
   options	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
		global values for local options)
   localoptions same as "options"
   slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
   unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.

					*'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
'virtualedit' 've'	string	(default "")
		global or local to window |global-local|
A comma-separated list of these words:
    block	Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
    insert	Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
    all		Allow virtual editing in all modes.
    onemore	Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line
    none	When used as the local value, do not allow virtual
		editing even when the global value is set.  When used
		as the global value, "none" is the same as "".
    NONE	Alternative spelling of "none".

Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
no actual character.  This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end
of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
editing a table.
"onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just
after the last character of the line.  This makes some commands more
consistent.  Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line
if the line was empty.  But it is far from Vi compatible.  It may also
break some plugins or Vim scripts.  For example because |l| can move
the cursor after the last character.  Use with care!
Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not
past it.  This may actually move the cursor to the left!
The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line.
It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will
not get a warning for it.
When combined with other words, "none" is ignored.

		*'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'*
'visualbell' 'vb'	boolean	(default off)
		global
Use visual bell instead of beeping.  Also see 'errorbells'.

					*'warn'* *'nowarn'*
'warn'			boolean	(default on)
		global
Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
has been changed.

					*'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
'whichwrap' 'ww'	string	(default "b,s")
		global
Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
the line.  Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
	char   key	  mode	~
	 b    <BS>	 Normal and Visual
	 s    <Space>	 Normal and Visual
	 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
	 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
	 <    <Left>	 Normal and Visual
	 >    <Right>	 Normal and Visual
	 ~    "~"	 Normal
	 [    <Left>	 Insert and Replace
	 ]    <Right>	 Insert and Replace
For example: >vim
	set ww=<,>,[,]
<	allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character.  This makes "3h"
different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line.  This
is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
"dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
cursor.
When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a
line (not an empty line) then it will not move to the next line.  This
makes "dl", "cl", "yl" etc. work normally.

					*'wildchar'* *'wc'*
'wildchar' 'wc'		number	(default <Tab>)
		global
Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
The character is not recognized when used inside a macro.  See
'wildcharm' for that.
Some keys will not work, such as CTRL-C, <CR> and Enter.
<Esc> can be used, but hitting it twice in a row will still exit
command-line as a failsafe measure.
Although 'wc' is a number option, it can be specified as a number, a
single character, a |key-notation| (e.g. <Up>, <C-F>) or a letter
preceded with a caret (e.g. `^F` is CTRL-F): >vim
	:set wc=27
	:set wc=X
	:set wc=^I
	set wc=<Tab>
<	'wildchar' also enables completion in search pattern contexts such as
|/|, |?|, |:s|, |:g|, |:v|, and |:vim|.  To insert a literal <Tab>
instead of triggering completion, type <C-V><Tab> or "\t".
See also 'wildoptions' and |wildtrigger()|.

					*'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
'wildcharm' 'wcm'	number	(default 0)
		global
'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
recognized when used inside a macro.  You can find "spare"
command-line keys suitable for this option by looking at
|ex-edit-index|.  Normally you'll never actually type 'wildcharm',
just use it in mappings that automatically invoke completion mode,
e.g.: >vim
	set wcm=<C-Z>
	cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
<	Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.

					*'wildignore'* *'wig'*
'wildignore' 'wig'	string	(default "")
		global
A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
|globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
Also see 'suffixes'.
Example: >vim
	set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
<	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
a pattern from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
uses another default.

	*'wildignorecase'* *'wic'* *'nowildignorecase'* *'nowic'*
'wildignorecase' 'wic'	boolean	(default off)
		global
When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.
Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set.
Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which
happens when there are special characters.

		*'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
'wildmenu' 'wmnu'	boolean	(default on)
		global
When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
mode.  On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
the possible matches are shown.
When 'wildoptions' contains "pum", then the completion matches are
shown in a popup menu.  Otherwise they are displayed just above the
command line, with the first match highlighted (overwriting the status
line, if there is one).
Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
'wildmode' must specify "full": "longest" and "list" do not start
'wildmenu' mode. You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|.
The menu is cancelled when a key is hit that is not used for selecting
a completion.

While the menu is active these keys have special meanings:
CTRL-P		- go to the previous entry
CTRL-N		- go to the next entry
<Left> <Right>	- select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
<PageUp>	- select a match several entries back
<PageDown>	- select a match several entries further
<Up>		- in filename/menu name completion: move up into
		  parent directory or parent menu.
<Down>		- in filename/menu name completion: move into a
		  subdirectory or submenu.
<CR>		- in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
		  dot: move into a submenu.
CTRL-E		- end completion, go back to what was there before
		  selecting a match.
CTRL-Y		- accept the currently selected match and stop
		  completion.

If you want <Left> and <Right> to move the cursor instead of selecting
a different match, use this: >vim
	cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
	cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
<
|hl-WildMenu| highlights the current match.

					*'wildmode'* *'wim'*
'wildmode' 'wim'	string	(default "full")
		global
Completion mode used for the character specified with 'wildchar'.
This option is a comma-separated list of up to four parts,
corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth presses of
'wildchar'.  Each part is a colon-separated list of completion
behaviors, which are applied simultaneously during that phase.

The possible behavior values are:
""		Only complete (insert) the first match.  No further
		matches are cycled or listed.
"full"		Complete the next full match.  Cycles through all
		matches, returning to the original input after the
		last match.  If 'wildmenu' is enabled, it will be
		shown.
"longest"	Complete to the longest common substring.  If this
		doesn't extend the input, the next 'wildmode' part is
		used.
"list"		If multiple matches are found, list all of them.
"lastused"	When completing buffer names, sort them by most
		recently used (excluding the current buffer).  Only
		applies to buffer name completion.
"noselect"	If 'wildmenu' is enabled, show the menu but do not
		preselect the first item.
If only one match exists, it is completed fully, unless "noselect" is
specified.

Some useful combinations of colon-separated values:
"longest:full"		Start with the longest common string and show
			'wildmenu' (if enabled).  Does not cycle
			through full matches.
"list:full"		List all matches and complete first match.
"list:longest"		List all matches and complete till the longest
			common prefix.
"list:lastused"		List all matches.  When completing buffers,
			sort them by most recently used (excluding the
			current buffer).
"noselect:lastused"	Do not preselect the first item in 'wildmenu'
			if it is active.  When completing buffers,
			sort them by most recently used (excluding the
			current buffer).

Examples: >vim
	set wildmode=full
<	Complete full match on every press (default behavior) >vim
	set wildmode=longest,full
<	First press: longest common substring
Second press: cycle through full matches >vim
	set wildmode=list:full
<	First press: list all matches and complete the first one >vim
	set wildmode=list,full
<	First press: list matches only
Second press: complete full matches >vim
	set wildmode=longest,list
<	First press: longest common substring
Second press: list all matches >vim
	set wildmode=noselect:full
<	First press: show 'wildmenu' without completing or selecting
Second press: cycle full matches >vim
	set wildmode=noselect:lastused,full
<	Same as above, but buffer matches are sorted by time last used
More info here: |cmdline-completion|.

					*'wildoptions'* *'wop'*
'wildoptions' 'wop'	string	(default "pum,tagfile")
		global
A list of words that change how |cmdline-completion| is done.
The following values are supported:
  exacttext	When this flag is present, search pattern completion
		(e.g., in |/|, |?|, |:s|, |:g|, |:v|, and |:vim|)
		shows exact buffer text as menu items, without
		preserving regex artifacts like position
		anchors (e.g., |/\<|).  This provides more intuitive
		menu items that match the actual buffer text.
		However, searches may be less accurate since the
		pattern is not preserved exactly.
		By default, Vim preserves the typed pattern (with
		anchors) and appends the matched word.  This preserves
		search correctness, especially when using regular
		expressions or with 'smartcase' enabled.  However, the
		case of the appended matched word may not exactly
		match the case of the word in the buffer.
  fuzzy		Use |fuzzy-matching| to find completion matches.  When
		this value is specified, wildcard expansion will not
		be used for completion.  The matches will be sorted by
		the "best match" rather than alphabetically sorted.
		This will find more matches than the wildcard
		expansion.  Currently fuzzy matching based completion
		is not supported for file and directory names and
		instead wildcard expansion is used.
  pum		Display the completion matches using the popup menu in
		the same style as the |ins-completion-menu|.
  tagfile	When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
		tag and the file of the tag is listed.	Only one match
		is displayed per line.  Often used tag kinds are:
			d	#define
			f	function

This option does not apply to |ins-completion|.  See 'completeopt' for
that.

					*'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
'winaltkeys' 'wak'	string	(default "menu")
		global
		only used in Win32
Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
menu.  This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
entering special characters.  This option tells what to do:
  no	Don't use ALT keys for menus.  ALT key combinations can be
	mapped, but there is no automatic handling.
  yes	ALT key handling is done by the windowing system.  ALT key
	combinations cannot be mapped.
  menu	Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
	shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system.  Other
	keys can be mapped.
If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
key is never used for the menu.
This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32.

					*'winbar'* *'wbr'*
'winbar' 'wbr'		string	(default "")
		global or local to window |global-local|
When non-empty, this option enables the window bar and determines its
contents. The window bar is a bar that's shown at the top of every
window with it enabled. The value of 'winbar' is evaluated like with
'statusline'.

When changing something that is used in 'winbar' that does not trigger
it to be updated, use |:redrawstatus|.

Floating windows do not use the global value of 'winbar'. The
window-local value of 'winbar' must be set for a floating window to
have a window bar.

This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

					*'winblend'* *'winbl'*
'winblend' 'winbl'	number	(default 0)
		local to window
Enables pseudo-transparency for a floating window. Valid values are in
the range of 0 for fully opaque window (disabled) to 100 for fully
transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.

UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'

						*'winborder'*
'winborder'		string	(default "")
		global
Defines the default border style of floating windows. The default value
is empty, which is equivalent to "none". Valid values include:
- "bold": Bold line box.
- "double": Double-line box.
- "none": No border.
- "rounded": Like "single", but with rounded corners ("╭" etc.).
- "shadow": Drop shadow effect, by blending with the background.
- "single": Single-line box.
- "solid": Adds padding by a single whitespace cell.
- custom: comma-separated list of exactly 8 characters in clockwise
  order starting from topleft. Example: >lua
     vim.o.winborder='+,-,+,|,+,-,+,|'
<

						*'window'* *'wi'*
'window' 'wi'		number	(default screen height - 1)
		global
Window height used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one
window and the value is smaller than 'lines' minus one.  The screen
will scroll 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
When resizing the Vim window, and the value is smaller than 1 or more
than or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
Note: Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, use
'lines' for that.

		*'winfixbuf'* *'wfb'* *'nowinfixbuf'* *'nowfb'*
'winfixbuf' 'wfb'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window
If enabled, the window and the buffer it is displaying are paired.
For example, attempting to change the buffer with |:edit| will fail.
Other commands which change a window's buffer such as |:cnext| will
also skip any window with 'winfixbuf' enabled.  However if an Ex
command has a "!" modifier, it can force switching buffers.

		*'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
'winfixheight' 'wfh'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window  |local-noglobal|
Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.  Set by default for the
|preview-window| and |quickfix-window|.
The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.

		*'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'*
'winfixwidth' 'wfw'	boolean	(default off)
		local to window  |local-noglobal|
Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.
The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.

					*'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
'winheight' 'wh'	number	(default 1)
		global
Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.  If the
focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the
cost of the height of other windows.
Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing.
Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen.
Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high.  This has the drawback
that ":all" will create only two windows.  To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4"
to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done,
using the |VimEnter| event: >vim
	au VimEnter * set winheight=999
<	Minimum value is 1.
The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the
height of the current window.
'winheight' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminheight' to set
the minimal height for other windows.

				*'winhighlight'* *'winhl'*
'winhighlight' 'winhl'	string	(default "")
		local to window
Window-local highlights.  Comma-delimited list of highlight
|group-name| pairs "{hl-from}:{hl-to},..." where each {hl-from} is
a |highlight-groups| item to be overridden by {hl-to} group in
the window.

Note: highlight namespaces take precedence over 'winhighlight'.
See |nvim_win_set_hl_ns()| and |nvim_set_hl()|.

Highlights of vertical separators are determined by the window to the
left of the separator.  The 'tabline' highlight of a tabpage is
decided by the last-focused window of the tabpage.  Highlights of
the popupmenu are determined by the current window.  Highlights in the
message area cannot be overridden.

Example: show a different color for non-current windows: >vim
	set winhighlight=Normal:MyNormal,NormalNC:MyNormalNC
<

					*'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
'winminheight' 'wmh'	number	(default 1)
		global
The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
status bar) if necessary.  They will return to at least one line when
they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
windows.  A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.

					*'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
'winminwidth' 'wmw'	number	(default 1)
		global
The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
a vertical separator) if necessary.  They will return to at least one
line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
to go.)
Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.

					*'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
'winwidth' 'wiw'	number	(default 20)
		global
Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If
the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
the width of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
always fill the screen.  Set it to a small number for normal editing.
The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
width of the current window.
'winwidth' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminwidth' to set
the minimal width for other windows.

					*'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
'wrap'			boolean	(default on)
		local to window
This option changes how text is displayed.  It doesn't change the text
in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
displaying continues on the next line.  When off lines will not wrap
and only part of long lines will be displayed.  When the cursor is
moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
horizontally.
The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary.  See
'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >vim
	set sidescroll=5
	set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
<	See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
on.
If 'nowrap' was set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, '>' is used
as the |lcs-extends| character regardless of the value of the 'list'
and 'listchars' options.  This is to prevent malicious code outside
the viewport from going unnoticed.  Use `:setlocal nowrap` manually
afterwards to disable this behavior.

					*'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
'wrapmargin' 'wm'	number	(default 0)
		local to buffer
Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
starts.  When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
and inserting continues on the next line.
Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
the text width to be further reduced.
When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.

		*'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'* *E384* *E385*
'wrapscan' 'ws'		boolean	(default on)
		global
Searches wrap around the end of the file.  Also applies to |]s| and
|[s|, searching for spelling mistakes.

					*'write'* *'nowrite'*
'write'			boolean	(default on)
		global
Allows writing files.  When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
still allowed.  Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
argument.  Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
writing a temporary file.

			*'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
'writeany' 'wa'		boolean	(default off)
		global
Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.

		*'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
'writebackup' 'wb'	boolean	(default on)
		global
Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
also on.
WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
See |backup-table| for another explanation.
When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
Depending on 'backupcopy' the backup is a new file or the original
file renamed (and a new file is written).

					*'writedelay'* *'wd'*
'writedelay' 'wd'	number	(default 0)
		global
Only takes effect together with 'redrawdebug'.
The number of milliseconds to wait after each line or each flush

vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: